Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
an international reference
1 Compact NS circuit breaker With the Compact system, Merlin Gerin
053100
applications
E26988
E44356
E20999
E44357
push
to
trip
push
to
trip push
to
trip
push
to
trip
M
G
push push
to to
trip trip
c protection of low-voltage
distribution networks
v installation in power distribution
switchboards c protection of c protection of incoming devices
v installation on symmetrical rails motor starters of industrial control panel c earth fault protection
E32454
E21272
N R
push
to
trip
push push
to to
trip trip
push push
to to
trip trip
2 Merlin Gerin
E27836
E27837
E27838
ratings and breaking
compact compact
capacities NS 250 N NS 250 H
compact
NS 250 L
The rating plates on the front face of the Ui750V Uimp8kV Ui750V Uimp8kV Ui750V Uimp8kV
circuit breakers indicate the breaking Ue Icu Ue Icu Ue Icu
capacity: (V) (kA) (V) (kA) (V) (kA)
N: normal 220/240 85 220/240 100 220/240 150
380/415 36 380/415 70 380/415 150
H: high 440 35 440 65 440 130
L: very high. 500 30 500 50 500 70
525 22 525 35 525 50
660/690 8 660/690 10 660/690 20
250 50 250 85 250 100
Ics = 100 % Icu Ics = 100 % Icu Ics = 100 % Icu
push
to
push
to trip
trip
push
to
trip
push push
to to
trip trip
Merlin Gerin 3
Compact: presentation
1. Breaking unit.
2. Trip unit.
3. Vigi earth-fault protection module.
1
4. Insulation monitoring module.
5. Voltage presence indicator.
7 8 6. Ammeter.
7. Voltage releases MN or MX.
11 8. Multifunction auxiliary switch.
9 9. Direct rotary handle.
10. Extended rotary handle.
10 11. Motor mechanism.
12. Plug-in base.
13. Connection of plug-in and
13 withdrawable configuration auxiliary
circuits.
14. Connection accessories.
15. Short terminal shields.
16. Long terminal shields.
2
2
4
3
6
14
4 Merlin Gerin
Compact circuit breakers make it possible Compact circuit breakers can be easily
simplified installation to standardise switchboards, meaning faster installed side-by-side in a minimum amount
installation and fewer errors. of space.
All type L Compact circuit breakers (150 kA)
are housed in the same frame as the type N
and type H models with the same ratings.
046893
4 sizes from 80 to 1250 A
053100
045345
046751
connection
041650
Merlin Gerin 5
Compact: presentation
Compact NS250H.
6 Merlin Gerin
other functions
045212
indication Four indication and measurement functions
may be mounted directly on Compact NS
and measurement circuit breakers:
c voltage presence indicator for the circuit
breaker terminals, particularly useful on
switchboard incoming units,
c display of current readings,
c remote transmission of current readings,
c earth fault indication for earth fault
detection on TNS systems or assistance in
locating earth faults on TT systems.
Merlin Gerin 7
Compact: presentation
common accessories
044314
c auxiliary switches:
044313
electrical auxiliaries
v Compact NS: just one model, the same for
all Compact NS80 to NS630 and NSA125/
160 circuit breakers, provides four different
functions (OF, SD, SDE and SDV)
depending on where it is fitted in the circuit
breaker,
v Compact C: two models, the same for all
Compact C801 to C1251 circuit breakers,
provide remote indications of circuit breaker
status and electrical faults (e.g. 30F + 1SD),
Auxiliary switch and MX release for Compact NS.
c the MN or MX voltage releases are
common for all models within each of
following ranges:
v NS80 and NSA125/160,
v NS100 to NS630,
v C801 to C1251.
c auxiliary switches for Compact NS are
also available in communicating version and
can be installed in place of the standard
switches (see Digipact catalogue).
8 Merlin Gerin
LV circuit breakers
and switch-disconnectors
Compact
80 to 1250 A
functions
and characteristics
page
9
Compact: functions and characteristics
applications
046893
053100
push
to
trip
045345
push push
to to
trip trip
protection page 22
The interchangeable thermal-magnetic or electronic trip units of the Compact NS are designed
to protect the following types of electrical installations:
c Standard installation (supplied by a transformer);
c Installations supplied by a generator;
push
push to
to trip
trip
c DC installations;
c Long cable lengths for IT and TN;
c Motors and motor starters.
push
to
trip
045198
041624
046751
10 Merlin Gerin
circuit breakers for protection of industrial control panels page 50
E44356
rated 12.5 … 100 12.5 … 12.5 ... 12.5 ... 60... 250...
current (A) 100 160 250 400 630
045198
push
to
trip
041624
054556
Compact NSC100 NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
(CEI947-2 / UL508 / CSA22-2)
breaking capacity N 18 25 35 35 42 42
(kA rms) 380/480 V H 65 65 65 65 65
rated 15-100 15-250 60-600
current (A)
054580
054569
054561
log
Compact NSE100 NSF150 NSF250 NSJ400 NSJ600
ta
ca (UL 489 / CEI947-2 / CSA22-2)
e d
at
dic breaking capacity N 18 35 35 35 35
de
to
re
fe
r (kA rms) 480 V H 65 65 65 65
L 100 100
044333
054556
push
to
trip
M
G
Merlin Gerin 11
Compact: functions and characteristics
applications (cont.)
source-changeover page 76
rated 12.5 … 12.5 … 12.5 … 160… 250… 320… 400… 500…
E32454
N R current (A) 100 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250
manual source- by toggle
changeover by rotary handle
system by keylock
automatic
053042
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
source-
changeover
053060
systems
053058
Compact NS100 to NS250 NS400 to NS630 C801 to C1251
All NS100 to NS250 type All NS400 to NS630 type All C801 to C1251 type N/H/NI
N/H/L/NA fixed or plug-in N/H/L/NA fixed or plug-in and C801 to C1251 type L
devices. devices. fixed devices.
12 Merlin Gerin
switch-disconnectors page 56
rated 100…160…250 400…630 800…1250
current (A)
E21272
86081
86083
push
to
trip
86087
push push
to to
trip trip
035053
052168
052164
log
ta
d
ca Fupact UC50 UC125 UD250T UD630T
te
d ica switches UD63 UD125 UD400T
de
o
rt
re
fe UD160
Merlin Gerin 13
Compact: functions and characteristics
general characteristics
recommendations:
MERLIN GERIN c IEC 947-1: general rules; comply with NF C 63-100 standard level 2
c IEC 947-2: circuit breakers; conditions (95% relative humidity at 45°C or
compact
c IEC 947-3: switches, disconnectors, 80% at 55°C, hot and humid climate
NS160 H conditions). They also comply with the
switch-disconnectors, etc;
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. c IEC 947-4: contactors and motors starters following standards:
Ue Icu c IEC 68-2-30 damp heat;
c IEC 947-5.1 and following - control circuit
(V) (kA) c IEC 68-2-2 dry heat;
220/240 100
devices and switching elements; automatic
control components. c IEC 68-2-11 salt spray;
380/415 70
In that these recommendations are applied c IEC 68-2-1 low temperatures.
440 65
500/525 50 in most countries, Compact circuit breakers
660/690 10 and auxiliaries comply with European environmental protection
250 85 (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the
Ics = 100% Icu corresponding national standards: Compact circuit breakers take
cat A c France NF; into account current concerns for
c Germany VDE; environmental protection. Most components
c U.K BS; are recyclable and parts are marked as
IEC 947.2 specified in applicable standards.
UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA c Austrialia AS;
c Italy CEI.
Standardised characteristics indicated
on the rating plate
They also comply with the specifications of ambient temperature
the marine classification companies (Veritas,
Ui: rated insulation voltage Lloyd’s Register of Shipping, Det Norske c Compact circuit breakers can be used at
Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage Veritas, etc). temperatures ranging from -25°C to 70°C.
Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various Compact circuit breakers are also designed Above 40°C (or 65°C for circuit breakers
values of the rated operational voltage Ue for the protection of machine tools in that used to protect motor feeders), always take
cat: utilisation category they comply with French standard into account the derating coefficients
Icw: short-time withstand current NF C 79-130 and with the recommendations indicated in the documentation;
Ics: service breaking capacity issued by the CNOMO organisation. c wherever possible the circuit breakers
In: rated current Concerning the United States UL, Canadian should be put into service at their normal
: suitable for isolation CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS ambient operating temperature, however this
standards, please consult us. can be done at temperatures between -35°C
and -25°C as long as this condition does not
last for an extended period;
pollution degree c in their original pack, Compact circuit
Compact circuit breakers are certified for breakers may be stored at temperatures
operation in pollution-degree III ranging from -50° to +85°C.
environments as defined by IEC
standard 947 (industrial environments).
NS160N 125…160 c c
NS250N 200…250 c
D1 c total discrimination: only the circuit breaker immediately upstream from a fault trips.
D2
14 Merlin Gerin
suitability for isolation All Compact circuit breakers are The isolation function is certified by tests
suitable for isolation as defined in IEC guaranteeing:
positive contact indication standard 947-2: c the mechanical reliability of the position
c the isolation position corresponds to the O indication system;
044 334
E18569
c padlocks may not be installed unless the
contacts are open.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor
mechanism does not alter the reliability
the position indication system.
degree of protection
(as per standards IEC 529)
bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
with toggle IP40
E18570
push
to
trip
ON
I
push
to
trip
O
OFF
push
to
trip
MCC IP43
ON
I
CNOMO IP54
push
to
trip
O
OFF
ON
I
push
to
trip
ON
O I
OFF
OFF
E28442
push
to
trip
/auto
I
manu O ON
push
OFF
push
Merlin Gerin 15
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks (cont.)
525 V
trip trip
660/690 V
DC 250 V (1 P)
500 V (2 P in series)
045345
Compact NS250H
protection (see following pages)
protection against interchangeable trip units
overcurrents (A) Ir setting current
048286
16 Merlin Gerin
NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
2 (*), 3, 4 2 (*), 3, 4 2 (*), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200
25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
10 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50
c c c c c
12.5...100 12.5...160 12.5...250 160...400 250...630
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 140 x 255 x 110
140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110
1.6 1.6 1.9 6.0 6.0
2.1 2.1 2.3 7.8 7.8
Merlin Gerin 17
Compact: functions et characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks (cont.)
18 Merlin Gerin
NS100 NS160 NS250
1 2 1 2 1
25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
25 40 25 40 25
25 65 25 65
10 35 10 35
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c
c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
Merlin Gerin 19
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks (cont.)
20 Merlin Gerin
C801 C1001 C1251
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
25 40 60 25 40 60 25 40
50 (1P)
50 (2P)
50 (3P)
25 (3P)
50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
12 12 6.4 15 15 8 15 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B B A B B A B B
c c c
12000 6400 15000 6400 15000
3000 3000 3000
1500 1500 1500
c c c
320...800 400...1000 500...1250
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c (*) c (*)
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
210 / 280 x 374 x 172 210 / 280 x 374 x 262 210 / 280 x 374 x 172 210 / 280 x 374 x 262 210 / 280 x 374 x 172
13 / 17 25 / 33 13 / 17 25 / 33 13 / 17
Merlin Gerin 21
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
trip units for Compact C801 to C1251
800 1250
standard protection,
STR 25 DE
N
H STR 35 GE
protection of networks supplied by
generators,
STR 35 SE
L
NH STR 45 AE
N P21 / P41
protection of DC networks.
E23820
E24039
1 1 7 5
t
Io .63 .8 t test Ir I
Ir .9 4 5
.95 3 6
.5 1 .85 2 8
xIn .8 1 1.5 10
xIo xIr
I
+ –
i 5
0 Ir I I
electronic trip units STR35SE/GE
E23821
E24040
1 8 1 7 3 4
t
Io .63 .8 t test Ir Im
.9 4 5
Ir
.95 3 6
.5 1 120s .85 2 8 3
xIn .8 1 1.5 10
xIo xIr
.3 .3
Im
tm + –
.2 .2
4
.1 .1
I 0 0
on It
2
off
5
1,5 Ir A i
C 801 N•H L
C 1001 N•H L C 1251N•H tm
A x In 15 8 12
0 Ir Im I I
Legend
1 "long time" protection threshold
2 "long time" protection time delay
3 "short time" protection threshold
4 "short time" protection time delay
5 "instantaneous" protection threshold
6 option (see page 34)
7 overload indication
8 test connector
30 Merlin Gerin
electronic trip unit STR45AE
E23823
E24037
1 8 2 1 7 4 3 6 t
2
STR 45AE 60 70 80 90 105 % Ir
fault
Io .63 .8 t Ir test Ir Im Ih
.9 4 5 .4
Ic1 .95 3 6 .3 3
.5 1 tr .85 2 8 .5
xIn .8 1 1.5 10 .2 .6
xIo xIr xIn
Ih Im S
120
60
240
.2
.3 .3
.2
.9
.95 .3
.4 .4
.3
4
tm
+ –
th .1 .1 .85 .2 .2
30
I
15 480
on
0
I2t
0
off
.8
xIr
1
on
.1
I2t
.1
off
5
A i – + at 1.5Ir Ic1
C 801N•H C 1001N•H C 1251N•H T tr tm th
TFR A x In 20 23 18
0 Ir Im I I
electronic trip unit STR45BE
E23824
E24036
1 8 2 1 3 7 4 6 t
2
STR 45BE 60 70 80 90 105 % Ir
Io .63 .8 t test Ir Im Ih
Ir .9 4 5 .4
.95 3 6 .3 3
.5 1 .85 2 8 .5
tr
xIn .8 1 1.5 10 .2 .6
xIo xIr xIn
Ih Im S
120
60
240
.2
.3 .3
.2 .3
.4 .4
.3
4
+ –
tm .1 .1 .2 .2
th 30
15 480 0 0 .1 .1
on I2t off on I2t off
i – + at 1.5Ir
T T tr tm th
0 Ir Im I
electronic trip unit STR55UE
E24038
E23822
1 8 2 1 7 4 3 5 6 t
2
STR 55UE 60 70 80 90 105 % Ir
fault
Io .63 .8 t Ir test Ir Im I Ih
.9 4 5 5 6 .4
Ic1
.95 3 6 4 8 .3 3
.5 1 tr .85 2 8 3 A .5
xIn .8 1 1.5 10 2 B .2 .6
xIn
Ih Im S 120
xIo
240 .3
xIr
.3 .9
xIn
.4 .4
4
60 .95 .3
tm
+ – .2 .2 .3
th
I 30
480
.1
0
.1 .85
.8 1
.2 .2 5
15 0 .1 .1
on I2t off
xIr on I2t off
C 801 N•H L i – + at 1.5Ir Ic1
C 1001 N•H L C 1251N•H
T tr tm th
TFR A 10 8 10
B 15 8 12
0 Ir Im I I
Merlin Gerin 31
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
trip units for Compact C801 to C1251 (cont.)
Tripping thresholds are indicated for 2 or Constant I2t positions Overload indication
3 poles on load. Inverse-time tripping (ST short-time LED in front of trip unit:
OFF position protection) to improve discrimination c lit at 90% of Ir setting;
LT (long time) protection deactivated for (particularly with downstream fuses). c flashing at 105 % or more of Ir setting.
motor-starter protection. Neutral protection Option F offers a five threshold indication
In the event 4P 4d or 4P 3d + Nr devices (60, 70, 80, 90, 105%).
Thermal memory
Conductor cooling time following tripping and the corresponding trip units are supplied Test
taken into account by LT protection. separately, a current sensor must be Test connector to check circuit breaker
installed on the fourth pole inside the circuit operation using a mini test kit or a calibration
breaker. test kit (see page 73).
Indication and measurement options (see
page 34).
32 Merlin Gerin
STR35GE STR45AE STR45BE STR55UE
c c c
c c c
adjustable (32 settings) adjustable (32 settings) adjustable (32 settings) adjustable (32 settings)
c c c c
c c c c
c c c
c c
c c c
c c c
c
Merlin Gerin 33
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
trip units for Compact C801 to C1251 (cont.)
E23825
t
Earth fault protection (T)
The earth fault protection is of the residual
E24042
E23826
t
option R is combined with option T), that
3 6 3 8 depends on the LT setting, control the opto-
E24041
Ic1 Ic2
tm
0 I
34 Merlin Gerin
earth fault protection (T)
tripping threshold Ih Ih = 0.2…0.6 x In
settings 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.3 - 0.35 - 0.4 - 0.45 - 0.5 - 0.6
accuracy ± 15%
time delay th th = settings 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
max. overcurrent time before tripping 60 140 230 350
total breaking time 140 230 350 500
power supply self powered
load monitoring (R)
Ic1 threshold Ic1 = 0.8...1 x Ir
settings 0.8 - 0.85 - 0.88 - 0.9 - 0.93 - 0.95 - 0.98 - 1.0
accuracy ± 8%
time delay closing tr/2 (tr = LT protection time delay)
opening 10 s
Ic2 threshold Ic2 = 0.5...1 x Ir
settings (1) 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.85 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1.0
accuracy ± 8%
time delay closing tr/4 (tr = LT protection time delay)
opening 10 s
transmission 100 mA opto-decoupled triac outputs, 120 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or a
signal via the communication output when the trip unit is
equipped with the COM option.
power supply self powered (2)
fault indications (F)
3 LEDs on front indicate cause of fault: Ir, Im/I, Ih
bar graph, 3 LEDs 60, 70, 80% of Ir
accuracy ± 6.6%
reset automatic when circuit breaker is reset
power supply 24 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz or CC
communication (COM)
type of data transmitted I1, I2, I3 Ineutral, Imax, all trip-unit settings, rating plug
identification (UL and JIS versions), load monitoring, fault
indications, causes of malfunction, internal temperature.
power supply self powered (2)
(1) For the Ic2 minimum setting, the Ir setting and/or the load must be u 0.5 In:
9600
7800
I(A)
Merlin Gerin 35
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
1000 V circuit breakers
36 Merlin Gerin
circuit breaker C1251N 1000 V
051353
Merlin Gerin 37
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
earth fault protection
Vigicompact circuit For Compact NS100 to NS630 circuit c suitability for isolation as defined by
breakers breakers, earth fault protection is obtained IEC 947-2;
by fitting a "Vigi" earth fault module directly c electrical characteristics;
c trip unit characteristics;
044333
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E21007
vigi MH
T R NS 250
200 / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz
4 test button for routine tripping checks by
internally simulating an earth fault
3 10
5 reset button (resetting is required following a trip
1 N 1 3 5 due to an earth fault)
6 rating plate
0,3 I∆n(A) T 7 slot for SDV auxiliary switch
HS 0,03 ( ∆t = 0 )
2 4 6
rated voltage (V) AC 50/60 Hz 200 to 440 200 to 440-440 to 550 200 to 440-440 to 550
(*) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 2P circuit breakers
(**) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, the tripping is not delayed
38 Merlin Gerin
combination of This solution can be used with all Compact Conformity with standards
circuit breakers. c IEC 947-2, appendix B;
Compact circuit breaker For Compact NS100 to NS630, the Vigirex c IEC 255-4 and IEC 801-2 to 5, covering
Vigirex earth fault residual current relays can be used when: protection against nuisance tripping due to
c special time delay or tripping threshold transient overvoltages, lightning strikes,
protection relay values are required; switching of devices on the network,
c there are major installation constraints electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency
(circuit breaker already installed and interference;
connected, limited space available, etc.). c IEC 755, class A, immunity to DC
Vigirex relay characteristics components up to 6 mA;
Residual current operated relay with c VDE 664, operation down to - 25°C.
separated toroid: For complete information on the
c sensivity adjustable from 30 mA Vigirex range, consult the corresponding
to 250 A; Merlin Gerin documentation.
c eight time-delay settings (0 to 1s);
➂ c closed toroids (30 to 300 mm diameter);
c split toroids (46 to 110 mm diameter);
push
to
trip
c options :
v trip alarm by a failsafe contact,
v pre-alarm contact and indicating light
M
G
(threshold: 0.5 x I∆n),
v 400 Hz network, etc.
➁ ➀
E18577
Merlin Gerin 39
Compact: functions and characteristics
motor protection
E26988
push
to
trip
electrical characteristics as per IEC 947-2 and EN 60947-2
rated current (A) In 65°C
rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
control auxiliaries
auxiliary releases
motor mechanism
rotary handles (direct, extended)
locking systems
installation and connection accessories
bare-cable connectors
terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and phase barriers
front panel escutcheons
40 Merlin Gerin
NS80 NS100 NS160 NS250
3 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
c c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c c
c c c
c c c c
c c c c
built-in c c c
c c c
c c c c
c c c
Merlin Gerin 41
Compact: functions and characteristics
motor protection (cont.)
E26988
push
to
trip
electrical characteristics as per IEC 947-2 and EN 60947-2
rated current (A) In 65°C
rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
42 Merlin Gerin
NS400 NS630 C801 C1001 C1251
3 3 3 3 3
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
140 x 255 x 110 140 x 255 x 110 210 x 374 x 172 210 x 374 x 172 210 x 374 x 172
6 6 13 13 25
Merlin Gerin 43
Compact: functions and characteristics
motor protection
trip units selection (cont.)
For motor protection, Compact circuit c electronic trip units, specifically designed
breakers may be fitted with: to provide:
c magnetic trip units, wich provide short- v short-circuit protection,
circuit protection; v overload protection,
v phase-failure protection.
P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz) 0.37 1.1 3 18.5 37 110 160 250 560 670
E26530
Ir (A) 1.5 2.5 6 40 48 80 100 160 205 220 320 500 800 1000 1250
Compact MA
NS80H-MA
Compact MA
NS100 … NS250
STR22ME
Compact MA
NS400 … NS630
STR43ME
trip units
trip units STR22ME STR43ME STR35ME STR55UE
rating (A) 20 to 70°C 10, 12.5, 20, 25, 40, 50, 80,100 150 220 120 200 320 500 800 1000 1250 800 1000 1250
NS100N/H/L c
NS160N/H/L c c
NS250N/H/L c c c
NS400N/H/L c c c
NS630N/H/L c
C801N/H/L c c
C1001N/H/L c c
C1251N/H c c
protection
overload (long time)
tripping Ir adjustable (10 settings) adjustable (40 settings) adjust. (32 settings) adjustable (32 settings)
threshold (A) 0.6...1 x In 0.4...0.8 x In 0.4...1 x In 0.4...1 x In
tripping class 10 10A 10 20 10 10A 10 20 30
(IEC 947-4)
tripping time (s) fixed adjustable fixed adjustable
(mini…maxi) to 1.5 x Ir 120…320 144…198 270…357 433…595 96…120 48…60 96…120 192…240 384…480
to 6 x Ir 6…15 5.8…7.3 10.9…13.1 17.4…21.8 6…7.5 3…3.7 6…7.5 12…15 24…30
to 7.2 Ir 4…10 4…5 7.3…9.1 12…15 4.2…5.2 2.1…2.6 4.2…5.2 8.3…10.4 17…21
phase-failure (complied with the standard IEC 947-4-1)
built into the trip unit c c
tripping time for phase between 3.5 and 6 s 4 s ± 10%
failures (s)
short-circuit (short time)
tripping Im or Isd fixed adjustable (8 settings) adjust. (8 settings) adjustable (8 settings)
threshold (A) 13 x Ir 6...13 x Ir 1.5...10 x Ir 1.5...10 x Ir
accuracy ± 20% ± 15% ± 15% ± 15%
max. overcurrent time fixed fixed adjustable adjustable
before tripping (ms) 10 10 0 60 140 230 0 60 140 230
total breaking time (ms) 60 60 60 140 230 350 60 140 230 350
short-circuit (instantaneous)
tripping Ii fixed fixed fixed = In x ... adjustable = In x ...
threshold 15 x In 13 x Ir maxi 15 15 12 2...15 2...15 2...12
(A) 8(type L) 2...8(type L)
other functions
SDTAM module c c
motor overload light c c (standard)
indications module c (standard) c
built-in ammeter (I) c
44 Merlin Gerin
electronic trip unit STR22ME
E26985
t
for Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers
1
1 7 8
E26984
Ir ImSTR 22 ME 3
In=50A u1,05 Ir
Ir 37.5 40 4
7,2Ir IEC 947.4 / cl.10
35.5 42.5
33.5 45 7,0s
5
31.5 47.5
30 50
A Ir 13 Ir test 0 Ir 13Ir I
protection c LT (long time) overload protection with c single - phasing protection. The single -
adjustable Ir threshold (1), in compliance phasing complies with the recommendations
with tripping class 10 as defined by of standard IEC 947-4-1. It becomes
IEC 947-4 (2); operational whenever a phase current
c single-phasing protection (trips in 3.5 and imbalance of 40% or more is present.
6 s);
c ST (short-time) short-circuit protection:
v fixed tripping threshold (13 x Ir) (3),
v fixed time delay (4);
c INST (instantaneous) short-circuit
protection, with fixed threshold (15 x In) (5).
Merlin Gerin 45
Compact: functions and characteristics
motor protection (cont.)
E26987
t
1
E32566
8 1 2 3 6
2
Io Ir Isd µP
.71 .8 .90 .93 9 10
.63 .88 .95 8 11 > Ir
.56 .85 .98 7 12 A 3
.5 .8 .8 1 13 tr
6 > Im
x In x Io x Ir 4
tsd
tr 20 20 > Ih
test 10 Ir I1 I2 I3
+ - 10 Ir Isd li 5
10A 10A
class
IEC 947-4-1
0 Ir Isd Ii I
protection c LT (long time) overload protection, c single - phasing protection. The single -
adjustable threshold, based on the actual phasing complies with the recommendations
rms current: of standard IEC 947-4-1. It becomes
v adjustable threshold (1) using five Io base operational whenever a phase current
settings (0.5 to 0.8), and fine adjustment Ir imbalance of 40% or more is present;
with eight settings ranging from 0.8 to 1, c ST (short time) short-circuit protection:
v adjustable tripping time (2), in compliance v adjustable threshold Isd (3),
with tripping classes 10 A, 10 and 20 as v fixed time delay (4);
defined by IEC 947-4; c INST (instantaneous) short-circuit
c the STR43ME offers two motor cooling protection, with fixed threshold (5).
time constants, associated with the motor
starting class:
v short cooling time constant (the same as
the heating time constant), providing
maximum continuity of service and
satisfactory motor protection,
v long cooling time constant (four times the
heating time constant), providing maximum
motor protection,
46 Merlin Gerin
options for trip unit STR43ME
ammeter (I) A digital display continuously indicates the
current of the phase with the greatest load.
E33990
contactor tripping module c opens the contactor in the event of an c fits in place of the MN and MX auxiliary
overload. It is thus possible to differentiate voltage releases.
(SDTAM) between tripping due to overloads and short-
circuits;
c may also be used to signal a thermal fault;
c must be reset manually (locally or
remotely;
c compatible with the following control
voltages:
v 24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC,
v 110 to 240 V AC / DC;
Merlin Gerin 47
Compact: functions and characteristics
motor protection (cont.)
E27368
1 8 1 7 3 4 t
1 OFF
on off
Io 1 t test Ir Im
.9 4 5
.8 Ir
.95 3 6 3
.63
120s .85 2 8
.5 off 1 10
.8 1.5
xIn xIo xIr
Im
.3 .3 4
.2 .2
tm + –
off .1
LR inopérant I
.1
0 0 5
LT inopérative on I2t off
Ir = In
1,5 Ir A i
C 801 N•H L
C 1001 N•H L C 1251N•H tm
A x In 15 8 12
0 Ir Im I I
2
STR 55UE 60 70 80 90 105 % Ir
fault
Io .63 .8 t Ir test Ir Im I Ih
.9 4 5 5 6 .4
Ic1
.95 3 6 4 8 .3 3
.5 1 tr .85 2 8 3 A .5
xIn .8 1 1.5 10 2 B .2 .6
xIo xIr xIn xIn
Ih Im S 120 240 .3 .3 .9 .4 .4 4
60 .95 .3
tm
+ – .2 .2 .3
th
I 30
15 480
.1
0 0
.1 .85
.8 1
.2
.1 .1
.2
5
on I2t off
xIr on I2t off
C 801 N•H L i – + at 1.5Ir Ic1
C 1001 N•H L C 1251N•H
T tr tm th
TFR A 10 8 10
B 15 8 12
0 Ir Im I I
48 Merlin Gerin
characteristics of short-circuit protection devices
with separate overload protection
046751
Compact NS100...NS630
with trip unit MA
For the protection of motors from 1.1 to
250 kW (400 V), Compact NS100 to NS630
circuit breakers must be equipped with a
special trip unit MA with adjustable
thresholds.
This assembly ensures:
c short-circuit protection (magnetic trip unit
Compact NS250H with adjustable thresholds);
c suitability for isolation.
For the Compact NS400 to NS630 circuit
045198
Compact NS400H-MA
short-circuit protection (magnetic)
tripping Im adjustable from adjustable from
threshold (A) 6...14 x In 9..14 x In 9..14 x In
Merlin Gerin 49
Compact functions and characteristics
protection of industrial control panels
number of poles
push
to
trip
electrical characteristics as per CEI 947-2 and EN 60 947-2
rated current (A) In 40°C
rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
ratde impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC
50 Merlin Gerin
NSC100N NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
42 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
18 25 65 35 65 35 65 42 65 42 65
10 10 10 10 10 18 18 18 18 30 30
built-in c c c c c
16...100 12.5...100 12.5...160 12.5...250 160...400 250...630
c c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c c
- c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c
- c c c c c
- c c c c c
- c c c c c
- c c c c c
c c c c c c
- c c c c c
c c c c c c
- c c c c c
- c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c c c
c c c c - -
90 x 120 x 80 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 140 x 255 x 110
120 x 120 x 80 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110
1.0 1.6 1.6 1.9 6.0 6.0
1.3 2.1 2.1 2.3 7.8 7.8
Merlin Gerin 51
Compact : functions et characteristics
protection of industrial control panels (cont.)
Marking
E42651
34XL
R
34XL
NSC100N-NA NS100-160-250 N/H/NA
Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit
This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
indicated here below, or the upstream protective device not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation. interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
Vac breaking capacity breaking capacity SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz
240 42
480 18 Vac NS100 NS160 NS250
600 10 N H N H N H
Vac 115 230 460 575 240 85 85 85 85 85 85
1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 480 25 65 35 65 35 65
hp 600 10 10 10 10 18 18
ratings (A)
tripping current 125% 100% rated
16 1 2 2 5 5 10 7.5 10
temperature rating tightening torque Terminal kit
20 1.5 3 3 5 7.5 10 10 15
75°C reference
25 2 3 3 7.5 10 15 10 20 wire size lb-inch Nm 3P 4P
32 2 5 5 10 10 20 15 30 14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
40 3 5 7.5 10 15 30 20 30 cable cross section 106 11.3 29242 29243
horsepower rating and tightening torques
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
50 3 7.5 10 15 20 30 25 40 4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 180 20
63 5 10 10 20 25 40 30 60 29259 29260
70 5 10 15 25 30 50 40 60 1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 230 26
80 7.5 10 15 30 30 60 40 75
100 10 15 20 30 40 75 50 100 device marking (circuit breaker with
tripping current 125% 100% rated interchangeable trip unit)
temperature rating tightening torque
75°C
wire size lb-inch Nm cable cross section
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
50 5.5
and tightening torques
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
52 Merlin Gerin
UL508 / CSA22-2 no. 14 approved circuit breakers
EXXXXX
Compact STR22ME
NS100 … NS250
auxiliaries All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit All rotary handles can be padlocked in "off"
breaker by the user: position.
c Padlocking devices (in "off" position). Optional door interlock, recommended for
c Rotary handle. MCC panels (motor control center).
c Status indication auxiliary contacts (on, off
and tripped). Early-make or early-break
c Shunt or undervoltage releases. contact
c Early-make or early-break contact.
These auxiliary contacts make it possible to
Rotary handle de-energise the downstream auxiliary
circuits of the control panel as well as the
Available in direct or extended versions for
auxiliary circuits supplying the MN release if
mounting up to 590 mm behind front. Choice
applicable.
of:
c Black front and black handle.
c Yellow front and red handle (for machine
tools or emergency stop as per IEC 204/
VDE 0013).
Merlin Gerin 53
Compact: functions and characteristics
switch-disconnectors
Compact switch-disconnectors
E21272
number of poles
electrical characteristics as per IEC 947-3
push
to
trip
conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60°C
rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC
rated operational current (A) Ie AC 50/60 Hz
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (1)
500 V
660/690 V
86087
DC
250 V (1P)
500 V (2P)
making capacity Icm (kA peak) mini (switch-disconnector only)
maxi (with circuit breaker
upstream protection) (2)
short-time withstand current Icw (A rms) 1s
3s
20 s
suitability for isolation
endurance (category A) (CO cycles) mechanical
electrical AC AC22A 500 V
Compact NS100NA
AC22A 690 V
electrical AC AC23A 440 V
Compact NS100NA to NS250NA switch- AC23A 500 V
disconnectors are obtained by mounting an electrical DC DC23A 250 V
NA switch-disconnector module on the basic DC23A 500 V
NS100 to NS250 frames.
positive contact indication
pollution degree
switch-disconnector protection
protection earth fault protection add-on Vigi module
According to installation standards, an Vigirex relay
upstream protection is required. installation and connections
Nonetheless, due to reflex tripping,
fixed/front connection
Compact NS100NA to NS250NA switch-
installation on symetrical rail
disconnectors self-protect for all fault
currents greater than 10 kA. fixed/rear connection
plug-in (on base)
withdrawable (on chassis)
indication and measurement auxiliaries
auxiliary switches
voltage presence indicator
current transformer module
ammeter module
insulation monitoring module
control auxiliaries
auxiliary releases
motor mechanism
toggle operated
rotary handles (direct, extended)
lateral rotary handle
locking by padlocks or keylock
manual/automatic source changeover system
installation and connection accessories
bare-cable connectors, terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and phase barriers
front panel escutcheons
dimensions and weights
dimensions 2/3 poles, fixed, FC
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA. W x H x D (mm)
(2) Upstream protection: see chapter 4 poles, fixed, FC
"complementary technical information" page 220. weight (kg) 3 poles, fixed, FC
(3) Extended only. 4 poles, fixed, FC
54 Merlin Gerin
NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA
2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4 2, 3, 4
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
c c c
Compact switch-disconnectors
E21272
number of poles
electrical characteristics as per IEC 947-3
push
to
trip
conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60°C
rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
CC
rated operational current (A) Ie AC 50/60 Hz
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (1)
500 V
660/690 V
86083
DC
250 V
500 V
making capacity Icm (kA peak) mini (switch-disconnector only)
maxi (with circuit breaker
upstream protection) (2)
short-time withstand current Icw (A rms) 1s
3s
20 s
suitability for isolation
endurance (category A) (CO cycles) mechanical
electrical AC AC22A 500 V
Compact NS400NA AC22A 690 V
electrical AC AC23A 440 V
AC23A 500 V
86081
c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
c c c c
140 x 255 x 110 140 x 255 x 110 374 x 210 x 172 374 x 210 x 172
185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110 374 x 280 x 172 374 x 280 x 172
5.2 5.2 13 13
6.8 6.8 17 17
Merlin Gerin 57
Compact: functions and characteristics
installation
E21020
Compact circuit breakers may be mounted Connection
vertically, horizontally or flat on their back See details page 0036
without any derating of characteristics.
E21293
Designed for easy installation in the various
types of switchboards of each market and
country.
E18580
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
mounting on backplate
E49661
push
to
trip
front connection
E23958
mounting on rails
E18850
push push
to
trip
to
trip
push
to
trip
mounting on symmetrical rails
58 Merlin Gerin
circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis
Compact NS100 to NS630
041879
Mounting
c on a backplate, through a front panel or on
The chassis is made up of two side plates
rails;
installed on the base and two other plates
c horizontally or vertically.
mounted on the circuit breaker.
Accessories
Chassis functions
c auxiliary switches for installation on the
All functions of the plug-in base, plus:
fixed part of the chassis, indicating the
"connected" and "disconnected" positions;
E21282
c toggle collar for circuit breakers with toggle
through front panel, intended to maintain the
degree of protection whatever the position of
the circuit breaker (supplied with a toggle
connected disconnected removed
extension);
Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis
c disconnected position: the power circuits c keylock which, depending of the bolt fitted,
are disconnected, the circuit breaker is can be used to:
simply "withdrawn" and may still be operated v prevent insertion for connection,
(on, off, push-to-trip); v lock the circuit breaker in connected or
c circuit breaker may be locked using 1 to disconnected position;
3 padlocks (diameter 5 to 8 mm), to prevent c telescopic shaft for extended rotary
connection; handles (see page 70).
c the auxiliaries can be tested (with manual Connection of auxiliaries: See page 68
auxiliary connector). manual or automatic auxiliary connector.
Door cutouts
A set of escutcheons makes it possible to:
The multi-function chassis for the Compact
c optimise cutouts. Only one cutout is
C801 to C1251 is particularly suitable for
required for circuit breakers:
incoming circuit breakers:
v with 3 or 4 poles,
c connection and disconnection through a
v with toggles or direct rotary handles;
door using a crank stored in the base of the
c ensure an IP 40 degree of protection.
chassis;
The set comprises:
c 2 positions (connected and disconnected)
c an escutcheon for the front of the chassis,
indicated:
providing access for locking and chassis
v locally by a position indicator,
operation;
v remotely via auxiliary switches (2 switches
c an escutcheon for circuit breaker operation
for the connected position and 2 switches for
with a view-port for visualisation of trip-unit
the disconnected position);
settings.
c opening and closing of the circuit breaker
through the front panel. Mounting
c rear mounting on a backplate or rails;
Locking systems
c mounting via the bottom on a plate or rails.
c chassis locking in connected or
Compact C801H on a withdrawable chassis disconnected position, by 3 padlocks and Power connections
2 keylocks that may be accessed through c to cables with crimped lugs;
c to flat or edgewise bars.
E16676
front panel;
c door locking to prevent opening it when Connection of auxiliaries
11
the breaker is in the connected position; Using automatic auxiliary connectors.
c racking interlock to prevent insertion of the
crank when the door is open.
10
Merlin Gerin 59
Compact: functions and characteristics
connection
Compact NS80
E23949
E29145
with connectors for bare cables.
Terminal shields can be fitted.
L
OFF
push
to
trip
NS80H
L (mm) 16
S (mm2) 1,5...70
equipped as standard for direct connection angle terminal extension, straight terminal
to insulated bars or cables with lugs: extension, edwgewise terminal extension,
terminals and snap-in nuts with screws speaders) for all connection requirements.
c Compact NS100: M6; On the Compact NS630, connections
c Compact NS160/250: M8; generally require spreaders (52.5 pitch).
c Compact NS400/630: M10.
E18601
E18600
E18599
E21276
push
to
trip
E23954
Right-angle terminal extension Straight terminal extension Edwgewise terminal extension Spreaders
For NS100 to 630 For NS100 to NS250 For NS400 to NS630 For NS100 to 630
cable connectors
Cable connectors for Compact NS will
accept either copper or aluminium cables.
E30907
L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 16
Ø (mm) >6 >8 > 10
E18578
d
d
L
L
60 Merlin Gerin
E18599
Spreaders
E23956
L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 40 i 60
trip
d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 20 i 20
Ø (mm) >6 >8 > 12 > 12
E29145
right-angle terminal L
extensions, the rear
connections or the terminals S
of the plug-in base;
E22040
NS100/160 NS250
c all connectors for Compact
NS400/630: screw onto the L (mm) 20 20
circuit breaker terminals, the S (mm2) Cu 1.5...95 10...185
right-angle terminal Al 1.5...95 25...185
push
cables 1 2
L (mm) 20 30…60
S (mm2) 35...300 70...240
E23957
E24076
E18579
4 positions
Merlin Gerin 61
Compact: functions and characteristics
connection (cont.)
E23961
The Compact C801…1251 are fitted as
standard with terminals comprising threaded Ø11
E23963
E23962
12,5 12,5
E23981
E23969
1
E23968
2
E24097
E23970
58 38
M10 S S
E23974
12 < Ø ≤ 13 110
max.
E23971
=
=
≤40
installed.
Ø11
M10x40 12,5
25
M10x40 ≤50
= 25 =
≤50 12,5 12,5
connection to cables with lugs
The additional connectors are suitable for
E23975
E23976
M10x40
M10x40
62 Merlin Gerin
insulation accessories
E18606
E18618 Terminal shields Phase barriers (Compact NS)
Sealable insulating accessories used for c safety accessories for maximum insulation
protection against direct contact with power at the power connection points;
circuits: c clip easily onto the circuit breaker;
c degree of protection: IP 40; c usable with all other connection
c supplied with sealing accessories. accessories, except terminal shields;
Terminal shield selection c special version for plug-in bases.
c for fixed circuit breakers (front connection):
long terminal shields;
c for fixed circuit breakers (rear connection):
E26033
short terminal shields;
c for plug-in circuit breakers: mandatory
short terminal shields;
c for voltage > 440 V, mandatory terminal
shields;
c for voltage > 525 V, special connection kit
including terminal shields and insulating
screens;
c for Compact NS400…630 with spreader:
special terminal shields for spreader.
Long terminal shields for plug-in bases
These insulating accessories are used to:
c protect against direct contact with power
circuits, degree of protection: IP 40.5;
c increase insulation between phases. Rear insulating screens (Compact NS)
Insulating accessories for plug-in bases Safety accessories for ensuring insulation
include: between power connections and the
c an adapter offering the same connection backplate. May be used with terminal shields
possibilities as for the circuit breaker; or with phase barriers.
c long terminal shields or special phase
barriers.
Merlin Gerin 63
Compact: functions and characteristics
auxiliaries
auxiliary switches
Changeover contact c switching of very low loads:
Auxiliary switches remote the circuit breaker All the above auxiliary switches are also
044314
operating status and can thus be used for available in "low-level" versions capable of
indications, electrical locking, relays, etc. switching very low loads (e.g. for the control
Functions of PLCs or electronic circuits).
c OF (open/closed): indicates the position of Standards
the circuit breaker contacts; Auxiliary switches comply with IEC 947-5.
c SD (trip indication): indicates that the Installation
circuit breaker has tripped due to: c functions OF, SD, SDE and SDV:
v an overload, v the switches clip into slots behind the front
v a short-circuit, of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module for
v an earth fault, the SDV function);
for Compact NS100 to NS630
v the operation of a voltage release or of the v for Compact NS80…630, one model
"push-to-trip" button, the operation of plug-in serves for all indication functions depending
base or chassis when breaker is on.
86089
64 Merlin Gerin
voltage releases
A voltage release can be used to trip the Shunt release (MX)
circuit breaker via a control signal. Trips the circuit breaker when the control
044313
Merlin Gerin 65
Compact: functions and characteristics
auxiliaries (cont.)
module, Compact NS circuit breakers c transfer to manual mode using switch (9)
feature very high mechanical endurance as with possibility of remote mode indication;
well as easy and sure operation: c on and off by 2 push-buttons;
c all circuit breaker indications and c recharging of stored-energy system by
information remain visible and accessible, pumping the lever 9 times;
including trip unit settings and indications; c padlocking in off position.
c suitability for isolation is maintained and Installation and connection
padlocking remains possible; c all installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable)
c double insulation front face. and connection possibilities are maintained;
Applications c connection of the motor mechanism
c local motor-driven operation, centralised module behind its front cover to an
operation, automatic distribution control; integrated terminal block, for cables with a
c normal/standby source changeover or CSA up to 2.5 mm2.
Compact NS250H with motor mechanism switching to a replacement source to Accessories
optimise energy costs; c keylock for locking in off position.
c load shedding and reconnection to c operations counter for the Compact
optimise energy costs; NS400 and NS630, indicating the number of
c synchrocoupling. on and off cycles. The counter must be
Automatic operation installed on the front of the motor
c on and off by two impulse type or mechanism module.
maintained control signals; Communication
c automatic spring charging following The motor mechanism module for
voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with Compact NS is also available in
standard wiring; communicating version (see Digipact
c mandatory manual reset following tripping catalogue).
due to an electrical fault.
Characteristics
E21006
1 2 3 4 5 6
motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
response time (ms) opening < 600
closing < 80
rate (cycles/minute max.) 4
MERLIN GERIN
control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60
compact
NS400 H 2
2 110/130 - 250
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV.
Ue
(V)
Icu
(kA)
AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130
220/240 100
380/415
440
70
65
220/240 - 380/440
500/525 40
600/690 35 consumption DC (W) opening i 500
closing i 500
cat B
Icw 6kA / 0,25s.
Ics = 100% Icu I ON charged AC (VA) opening i 500
IEC 947-2
UTE VDE BS CEI
closing i 500
UNE NEMA
In = 400A
manu auto O I 1
push OFF push ON 50
40
30 NS100
10 9 8 7 20 NS160
1 contact position indicator (suitability for isolation). 15
2 outgoing circuit identification labels.
3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged).
4 locking device (keylock).
5 locking device (off position) using 1 to 3 padlocks,
10 NS250
diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied.
6 manual spring charging lever.
7 I (on) push-button.
8 O (off) push-button. 6 NS400
9 manual/auto mode selection switch; the position
of the switch can be indicated remotely.
10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630). NS630
4
66 Merlin Gerin
motor mechanism for Compact C801 to C1251
The motor mechanism fits on the front face c mandatory manual reset following tripping
86090
Characteristics
motor mechanism T801/1001/1251 TS801/1001/1251
(for synchrocoupling)
response time (ms) opening 500 1500
closing 400 60
rate (cycles/minute max.) 2 2
control voltage (V) DC 24 - 48/60 - 110/125 24/30 - 110/125
220/250
AC 50/60 Hz 110/127 - 220/240 110/127 - 220/240
380/415 - 440/480
consumption DC (W) opening 500 400
closing 500 220
AC (VA) 110 to 240 V 380 to 480 V 110 to 240 V
opening 750 1000 400
closing 750 1000 220
Electrical endurance
(circuit breaker + motor mechanism in
thousands of cycles FO IEC 947-2, at 440 V
with a power factor of 0.8).
Endurance at 660 V equals 70% of
endurance at 440 V.
E24044
20
15
10
2
1,5
1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 1 I/In
Merlin Gerin 67
Compact: functions and characteristics
auxiliaries (cont.)
E28444
E28443
E21295
E26034
OF1 SD SDE OF2 OF1 OF2 OF3 SD SDE
68 Merlin Gerin
connections of auxiliaries: Compact C801 to C1251
fixed configuration
E24051
E24049
Wires connect:
c directly to the auxiliary through the back of
the breaker;
c to a terminal block fixed on the back of the
Rear connection terminal block Compact (6.35 mm tabs). This terminal
block is identical to the fixed part of the
auxiliary connectors.
withdrawable configuration
E24054
Merlin Gerin 69
Compact: functions and characteristics
auxiliaries (cont.)
rotary handles
direct rotary handle Installation
045349
accessories
Shaft support
Intended for the extended rotary handle
(short shaft) of Compact C801…1251.
Automatically supplied with orders for long
shafts. Eliminates vertical play at the end of
the shaft. Facilitates closing of switchboard
doors equipped with several rotary handles.
Early make/break switches
See page 64.
Locking and interlocking systems
See opposite page.
70 Merlin Gerin
locking and interlocking systems
locking systems c locking in the off position guarantees
isolation as per IEC 947-2 standard;
c padlocking systems can receive up to
three padlocks with diameters ranging from
5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
E18613
E18621
E18620
ON
I
push push
to to
trip trip
pr
of
al
ux
O
OFF
locking of the toggle using a removable device locking of the toggle using a fixed device locking of the rotary handle using a padlock or a keylock
c two double-bolt mechanical devices can c interlocking with keys may be easily
be used to interlock three circuit breakers implemented by equipping each of the
installed side-by-side, in which case one Compact, either fixed or withdrawable, with
E21399
circuit breaker is in the on position and the a direct rotary handle and a standard
two others in the off position. keylock, but with only one key for the two
I
ON keylocks. This solution enables two
ON
I geographically distant circuit breakers to be
I
ON interlocked.
tripped
ON
I
reset
O
OFF
tripped O OFF
reset
O
OFF
O OFF
Merlin Gerin 71
Compact: functions and characteristics
accessories
Electrical characteristics
Operates on all networks with voltages
For Compact NS100…630
ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.
Function
Detects and indicates that circuit breaker
terminals are supplied with power.
Installation
c in the long or short terminal shields, via
the knockouts, upstream or downstream
from the circuit breaker;
c degree of protection: IP 40.
72 Merlin Gerin
insulation monitoring Electrical characteristics
041896
Merlin Gerin 73
Compact: functions and characteristics
accessories (cont.)
E23936
for fixed or plug-in Compact NS
E21265
E23935
22
arged
disch arged
disch
O OFFOFF
O
∅5...8
∅5...8
1
1
II
OO ON
push h ON
OFF pus
push h OFF
pus
E23938
push
to
trip
ON
I
Toggle cover
O
push
to
trip OFF
c degree of protection IP 43;
c filts on the front of the circuit breaker.
E22039
Front panel escutcheon for motor
mechanism module or rotary handle
Secures to the panel by four screws, from
80
A
for toggle and Vigi module with a Vigi module installed through the
Secures to the panel, from the front. door, use the toggle collar (see below) for
the Vigi module.
disconnected).
c front panel escutcheons are obligatory
(identical to those for rotary handle and for
ammeter module);
c toggle collars secured by 2 screws on the
push
to
trip
circuit breaker;
c front panel escutcheons secured on the
switchboard;
c toggle extension is supplied with the toggle
collar.
For the insulation monitoring module, use
the same elements as for the Vigi module.
Front panel escutcheons for motor
mechanism, rotary handles, ammeter
modules
Same as for the fixed circuit breaker with the
same equipment (see above).
escutcheon
for chassis
operation
74 Merlin Gerin
outgoing circuit identification Compact NS circuit breakers come with
labels designed for handwritten indications.
E18595
c front removal;
c rotary handle removal;
c opening of the motor mechanism module;
c access to auxiliaries;
c access to trip unit settings;
c access to earth fault protection settings;
c trip unit removal;
c terminal shield removal;
c access to power connections.
Merlin Gerin 75
Compact: functions and characteristics
source-changeover systems
c for Compact NS100...250 (three or four- Two identical systems can be used to
pole); interlock three circuit breakers installed side-
c for Compact NS400...630 (three or four- by-side, in which case one circuit breaker is
pole). in the on position and the two others in the
push
to
Padlocking systems can receive 1 or off position.
trip
ON
Padlocking of the rotary handles is possible
I
ON
tripped with the circuit breakers in off position.
I
reset
O
OFF
tripped O OFF
reset
O
OFF
O OFF
O
OFF
Use:
c a keylock adapter (different for each
O
OFF
device);
c two identical keylocks with a single key.
interlocking by base plates Two models: The base plates described below are
c for Compact NS100...250; designed for two Compact circuit breakers or
switch-disconnectors. They provide
E33943
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
76 Merlin Gerin
automatic source-changeover systems
053042
053060
053058
automatic source-changeover systems Controller
source-changeover system without controller In this case, the automatic control system to
initiate changeovers between the "Normal"
The source-changeover system is made and "Replacement" sources under predefined
E32699
3 2
1
660V 92-1 N
0 . OFF
AC3-IEC2
GERIN
MERLIN
multi
9
UR 0,5s
P25M
660V 92-1
R
AC3-IEC2
UN
N I 0,5s
ON /
I /O
ON / R
Test
OFF
1
UN =
/O
Test OFF
fault
fault
stop
test
manu
N
B US
IN
N GER O
MERLI UN =
N
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / /O 1
OFF UN =
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
stop
test
5
manu or
STOP
generat
R
7
Merlin Gerin 77
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems (cont.)
circuit breaker selection
(1) A Vigi module can only be mounted on one of the two devices,
(2) Vigi module or current transformer or ammeter or insulation monitoring module,
(3) Long rear connections only.
78 Merlin Gerin
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems (cont.)
base plate selection
base plate for Compact NS100...630 base plate for Compact C801...1251
For fixed, front-connected or for plug-in For fixed Compact C.
Compact NS circuit breakers, with or One model only for Compact
without earth-fault protection or C801...1251 N/H/L/NI;
measurement modules (see page 66). Dimensions:
Two models: c Compact C801...1251: 655 x 480 mm.
c for Compact NS100...250;
c for Compact NS400...630:
v this base plate can be fitted as standard
with two fixed Compact NS100...250 circuit
breakers,
v a conversion kit is available to fit two plug-
in Compact NS100...250 circuit breakers,
v both fixed and plug-in versions of Compact
NS100...250 circuit breakers can be fitted if
they are equipped with terminal spreaders.
Dimensions:
c Compact NS100...250: 350 x 300 mm;
c Compact NS400...630: 440 x 390 mm.
Coupling accessory
E26283
and electrical interlocking unit IVE is used as the motor mechanism voltage.
to connect the operating mechanism.
Inputs: opening, closing and reset orders for
each circuit breaker.
c inputs: opening, closing and resetting
control signals for each device;
c outputs: position of SDE auxiliary
switches on the "Normal" and
"Replacement" circuit breakers.
Control voltage: two models
c 24 to 250 V DC (Compact NS);
c 48 to 415 V, 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz
(Compact NS and Compact C).
Merlin Gerin 79
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems (cont.)
controller option selection
E32704
F
MERL
9
IN GERIN 0 . OF
multi
P25M
660V
F C292-1
0 . OF
AC3-IE
IN GERIN
MERL
9
multi
P25M
660V
C292-1
AC3-IE
Test
Test
B US
RIN
IN GE UN =
O
MERL
N
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / /O
OFF UN =
1
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
stop
test
manu tor
STO
P genera
R
F
MERL
9
IN GERIN 0 . OF
multi
P25M
660V
F C292-1
0 . OF
AC3-IE
IN GERIN
MERL
9
multi
P25M
660V
C292-1
AC3-IE
Test
Test
B US
RIN
IN GE UN =
O
MERL
N
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / F/O 1
OF UN =
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
stop
test
manu tor
STO
P genera
R
customer
connection
c two P25M circuit breakers supplying and Power is supplied by the "Normal" and
protecting the automatic control circuits for "Replacement" sources. The control voltage
the "Normal" and "Replacement" sources. for the auxiliaries control plate must be the
These circuit breakers have an infinite same as for the IVE unit and the motor
breaking capacity; mechanisms.
c two relay contactors for the BA or UA Control voltages
controller; c 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz;
c the terminal block for connection to the c 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz.
controller.
Installation:
The auxiliaries control plate ACP must be
wired to the circuit breaker base plate by the
customer.
80 Merlin Gerin
controller
053058
Controller UA
controller BA UA
compatible circuit breakers All Compact NS100 to C1251 circuit breakers
4-position switch
automatic operation c c
forced operation on "Normal" source c c
forced operation on "Replacement" source c c
stop (both "Normal" and "Replacement" sources off) c c
automatic operation
monitoring of the "Normal" source and automatic changeover c c
generator set control c
load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits c
changeover to the "Replacement" source if one of the phases of the
"Normal" phase is absent c
test
by opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller c
by pressing the test button on the front of the controller c
indications
circuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller: on, off,
fault trip, automatic mode indicating contact c c
automatic mode indicating contract c c
other functions
selection of type of "Normal" source (single-phase or three-phase) c
voluntary transfer to "Replacement" source (e.g. energy management commands) c c
during peak-tariff periods (energy management commands), forced operation
on "Normal" if "Replacement" source not operational c
supplementary control contact (not carried out by the controller). Transfer to
"Replacement" source only if contact closed. (ex: UR frequency control) c c
setting of maximum startup time for the replacement source c
power supply
control voltages (1) 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz
options
communication option c
(1) The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker motor mechanisms. If this voltage is the same as the source voltage, then
the "Normal" and "Replacement" sources can be used directly for the power supply. If not, a BC type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used.
Merlin Gerin 81
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems
controller option selection (cont.)
BA automatism
v forced operation on source N, (e.g. energy management commands),
220/240 V 50/60 Hz
2 4 t1
v forced operation on source R, - supplementary control contact (not carried
N UN R UR N UN = 0
1 8 s
15
v stop (both "Normal" and "Replacement" out by the controller). Transfer to
0.5
0.1 30
sources off); "Replacement" source only if contact closed
ON/I ON/I c adjustment of time delays in front: (ex: UR frequency control),
0.5s 0.5s
OFF/O OFF/O v t1 from 0.1 to 30 seconds, v outputs:
t2 15 30
v t2 from 0.1 to 240 seconds; - indication of operation in automatic mode.
s 8 60
120
UN = I R c circuit breaker status indication on the Connection to the terminal block: see
fault fault 4
0.1 240 front of the controller: on, off, fault trip; page 174.
reset
stop auto c controller BA can be tested by opening
manu
the P25M circuit breaker on the N circuit,
thus simulating a failure of UN.
N R See detailed transfer steps on page 83.
82 Merlin Gerin
c 4-position switch in "stop" position c 4-position switch in "auto" position c 4-position switch in "N " position
(automatic operation) (forced operation on "Normal" source)
E21108
E27107
E30187
off QN et QR open operat. on N R 4-position switch N et UN présente
source N I O
UN fail (duration > t1) or voluntary
"auto" switching order received
UR present and supplementary QR opens
control contact N➡R closed
reset duration a 1 s
QN opens
t > 0,5 s
end of reset
t > 0,5 s QN closes
QR closes QN closed
"stop"
operat. on N R
QR closed
source N I O
E32708
t > 0,5 s
4-position switch in "R" position
UR present and supplementary control
contact N➡R closed
QN closes
QN opens
QN closed
t > 0,5 s
QR closes
QR closed
operat. on N R
source R O I
Merlin Gerin 83
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems
controller option selection (cont.)
automatic functions:
c switching from one source to another
depending on the presence of voltage UN on
the "Normal" source;
c control of an engine generating set;
c shedding and reconnection of non-priority
circuits;
c switching to the "Replacement" source in
the event of a failure on one of the phases of
the "Normal" source.
UA automatism
220/240 V 50/60 Hz
2 4 t1
1 8 s Operation c integrated terminal block for connection of
N UN R UR N UN = 0 0.5 15
0.1 30 c a four-position switch can be used to the following signals:
ON/I ON/I
t4 5 10 5 10 t3 select: v inputs:
s 2 15 2 15 s
OFF/O OFF/O
1 20 1 20 v automatic operation, - order for voluntary transfer to source R
0.5 30 0.5 30
v forced operation on source N, (e.g. energy management commands),
t2 15 30
s 8 60 v forced operation on source R, - supplementary control contact (not carried
fault fault 4 120
UN = I R
0.1 240 v stop (circuit breakers open and manual out by the controller). Transfer to
reset
stop auto
240 300 t5
operation); "Replacement" source only if contact closed
manu 160 360 s c adjustment of time delays in front: (ex: UR frequency control),
test 120 480
60 600 v t1 from 0.1 to 30 seconds, v outputs:
N R v t2 from 0.1 to 240 seconds, - control of engine generator set,
STOP generator v t3 from 0.5 to 30 seconds, - load shedding of non-priority circuits,
v t4 from 0.5 to 30 seconds, - indication of operation in automatic mode;
Front face of controller UA
v t5 from 60 to 600 seconds; c 3 switches provide the following functions:
c circuit breaker status indication on the v selection of the type of "Normal" source,
front of the controller: on, off, fault trip; i.e. single-phase or three-phase;
Time delay settings:
QN: Compact circuit breaker with motor c test button on the front of the controller to v enable or disable voluntary energy
mechanism on "Normal" source, check the transfer from the "Normal" source management transfer if the "Replacement"
QR: Compact circuit breaker with motor to the "Replacement" source and the return source is not operational;
mechanism on "Replacement" source, to the "Normal" source; v selection of the maximum tolerated
t1: time delay before QN opens when the voltage starting time for the engine generator set
UN of the "Normal" source disappears,
t2: time delay before QR opens when the voltage ("Replacement" source): 120 s or 180 s.
UN of the "Normal" source is restored,
t3: time delay before QR closes once QN has
opened and the load has been shed, Batibus option for controller UA In automatic mode, this communications
t4: time delay before QN closes once QR has
opened and the load has been reconnected, A communication function can be used to option also offers the possibility of remote
t5: time delay for confirmation of presence of UN check the following from a remote location: forced operation on the "Replacement"
before stopping the generator set. c status of the circuit breakers (open, closed source.
or fault trip);
c voltage presence on the "Normal" and
"Replacement" sources;
c presence of an order forcing operation on
the "Replacement" source (e.g. for energy
management purposes);
c values of settings and configurations,
c status of the non-priority circuits (whether
subject to load shedding or not).
84 Merlin Gerin
c 4-position switch in "stop" position c 4-position switch in "auto" position c 4-position switch in "N" position
(automatic operation) (forced operation on "Normal" source)
E30185
E30187
E27107
reset duration a 1 s
genset startup t > t4
"stop"
operat. on N R
t > t3 genset off
source N I O
t > t4
UR present for t < 120 s or 180 s
and supplementary control contact
N➡R closed
QN closes
QN opens and load
shedding
QN closed
t > t3
genset remains on
QR closes
UN present for t > t5 and no
voluntary switching order received
QR closed
genset off
operat. on N R
genset on
source R O I
UR absent
action on 4-position switch
Merlin Gerin 85
Compact: functions and characteristics
automatic source-changeover systems
controller option selection (cont.)
86 Merlin Gerin
LV circuit breakers
and switch-disconnectors
Compact
80 to 1250 A
installation, connection
and wiring diagrams
page
installation
possible mounting positions and supports 88
safety perimeters 90
weights 92
implementation 93
Compact NS80H-MA 94
Compact NSC100 96
fixed Compact 98
fixed Vigicompact 104
fixed Compact with Visu module 106
plug-in and withdrawable Compact 110
plug-in and withdrawable Vigicompact 118
motor mechanism modules 120
rotary handles 122
indication and measurement modules 126
front accessories 128
manual source changeover systems 130
connection
Compact NS fixed, front connection 138
Compact NS fixed, rear connection 141
Compact NS withdrawable,
front connection 142
Compact NS withdrawable,
rear connection 143
Compact C fixed, front connection 144
Compact C withdrawable,
rear connection 145
fixed Compact or Vigicompact 146
plug-in and withdrawable Compact
or Vigicompact 150
wiring diagrams
legend 154
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N 155
Compact NS100 to NS250 156
Compact NS400 to NS630 157
Compact NS motor mechanism 158
Compact C801 to C1251 164
Compact C motor mechanism 166
automatic source-changeover systems:
c Compact NS100 to NS630 174
c Compact C801 to C1251 180
automatic source-changeover systems:
c Compact NS and C 182
motor protection 188
early-make switch (CAF) 194
87
Compact: installation
possible mounting positions and supports
E23922
E23923
fixed or withdrawable breaker
push
to
trip
fig C fig D
E23925
E23924
push
to
trip
push
trip
to
fig E
E23926
trip
to
push
88 Merlin Gerin
possible supports plain plate slotted plate
E23928
fixed or withdrawable breaker
E23922
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
rails
E23927
push
to
trip
Merlin Gerin 89
Compact: installation
safety perimeters
Circuit breakers must be installed at certain They are related to the ultimate breaking The distances are calculated from the circuit
distances from panels, bars and other circuit capacities at voltages from 220 V to 690 V. breaker case and not from the terminal
breakers. Taken together, these distances For voltages less than 500 V, terminal shields or phase separators.
form the safety perimeter for the circuit shields or phase barriers are recommended. Always respect these recommendations. In
breaker. The diagrams and the table below For voltages from 500 V to 600 V, terminal addition, if the installation is not subjected to
indicate the required distances when shields or phase barriers are mandatory. type tests, always:
installing Compact circuit breakers. For voltages greater than 600 V, the - connect the circuit breaker using insulated
These distances come from tests defined by insulation kit is mandatory. bars,
standard IEC 947-2. - isolate the busbars using barriers that
respect the safety perimeters indicated
below.
minimum distance
between circuit breakers between circuit breaker and top, between connections and front
bottom or side plate or rear panel
E50701
panneau F
front panel
frontal
E50700
E23942
A1
A2 D1
D2 C1
C2
B F
bare or painted metal plate;
insulated plate or insulated bar if F < 8 mm: insulation screen mandatory
90 Merlin Gerin
between circuit breakers: installation example
E50704
painted
tôle metal
peinteplate
A A A A
Direct wire connection; breakers with Cable lug connection; breakers with Insulated bar connection; breakers with Rear connection or plug-in base;
terminal shields. terminal shields. terminal shields. breakers with short terminal shields.
insulation kit
40
bare or painted
metal plate; 30
F insulated plate or
B=0 insulated bar
Merlin Gerin 91
Compact: installation
weights (kg)
circuit plug-in base chassis Vigi module Visu module motor mechanism
breaker
NS80H-MA 3P/3t 1.09
NSC100N 3P/3t 1 1.5
4P/4t 1.3 1.7
NS100N/H 1P/1t 0.5
2P/2t 1.45
NS100N 3P/2t 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
NS100N/H/L 3P/3t 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
4P/4t 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.8 1.2
NS160N/H 1P/1t 0.5
2P/2t 1.45
NS160N 3P/2t 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
NS160N/H/L 3P/3t 2.10 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
4P/4t 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.8 1.2
NS250N 3P/2t 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
NS250N/H/L 3P/3t 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2.8 1.2
4P/4t 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.8 1.2
NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3t 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 8 2.8
4P/4t 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 8 2.8
C801/C251N/H 3P 13 18 16 5.7 (T); 4 (TS)
4P 17 19 18 5.7 (T); 4 (TS)
C801/C1001L 3P 25 20 5.7 (T); 4 (TS)
4P 33 21 5.7 (T); 4 (TS)
92 Merlin Gerin
Compact: installation
Compact NS and C
implementation
push
to
trip
materials and Compact NS and C circuit breakers can be In case of short circuit current, thermal and
connected either with bare copper, tinned electrodynamic stresses will be applied to
electrodynamic stresses on copper or tinned aluminium conductors (rigid these conductors.
conductors or flexible bars, cables). It is necessary to size them properly and to
maintain them correctly with supports.
E23948
outgoing cables
securing cables and The following table gives the maximum Never exceed a distance of 400 mm
distance between cable ties as a function of between cable collars mechanically secured
flexible bars the prospective short circuit current. to the frame of the switchboard.
type of cable ties max distance between short circuit current (kA rms)
cable ties (mm)
"PANDUIT" type 200 10
width: 4.5 mm 100 14
max load: 22 kg 50 19
white
"SAREL" type 350 21
width: 9 mm 200 27
max load: 90 kg 100 36
black 70 45
double ties 50 100
Note: for cables u 50 mm2, use cable ties of 9 mm width.
Merlin Gerin 93
Compact: installation
Compact NS80H-MA
dimensions mounting
on backplate on rails
30
E21875
E21874
E21876
30
15 15
E21873
≤32
103
120
100 100
X X X X
48,5 48,5
60 206
(a) ∅4
Y Y
∅4
Y
64,5 45
70 90
80
84
100
Z
(a) a long terminal shields
E21882
E21883
E21884
A
B/C
Y Y Y
71 14,5 46
81 29 92
Z
connections
front connection, direct connection
E21879
E21880
E21877
E21878
97
X X
18 48,5
N
GERI
MER
LIN
OFF
Y
1,5 ➞ 50 mm2 32 29,2 29,2
Z
push
to
trip
94 Merlin Gerin
direct rotary handle
dimensions front panel cutout
E21888
E21885
7,5
E21886
E21887
ON
I
65,5 60° 4,2
X 68,5
tripped
X X
28,5 60° X
O
OFF
30
Y
47,5 Y
82,5 45 85 43
112 80
Z 86
Z 90
E21889
E21891
75 45°
37,5 7,5
7,5
∅50
60° 4,2
X
4,2 75
X
X 37,5
∅4,2
60°
72 36 Y
mini 175 Y
maxi 590
Z
cut shaft at length = P11 – 109
120
E21892
69,2
7,5
E21893
E21894
4,2 120
100
X
X
60 45,8
1 to 3 maxi Y
Y
51,7
116 ± 2
100
E22046
Note:
Door cutouts require a minimum distance between
the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge
point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
Merlin Gerin 95
Compact: installation
Compact NSC100
dimensions
Compact NSC100
3 poles 4 poles
E43398
E43399
E43400
103
120
X X X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 45
84 90 120
100
Z (a) long terminal shield.
Vigicompact NSC
3 poles 4 poles
101,2
E43401
E43403
E43402
103
120
X X
X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 75
84 210 240
100
Z (a) long terminal shield.
75
37,5
E31296
5 45° 5
E43404
83
Ø50
60°
3 3
75
X
X 37,5 X
60° Ø4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 122
Z
maxi 147
Note:
The X-axis is the axis of symmetry of the rail.
96 Merlin Gerin
connections
Compact NSC100
E43406
E43405
30 30 34,5
48,5
X X
48,5
18
Y
45 34,5 1,5 70 mm2
90 83
Z
Vigicompact NSC
connection via the bottom connection via the top
4 poles 4 poles
30 30 30 30
E43407
60,8 30 60,8 30
E43408
30 30 30 30 30 30
X X
Y Y
ouput
Merlin Gerin 97
Compact: installation
fixed Compact NS100 to NS630
dimensions
E21504
E21502
E21503
H1 H3 H5 H7
X X X
H H2 H4 H6
(a)
Y (b)
(c)
Y
P1 L L
P2 L1 L2
P4
Z
mounting
on backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21507
E21508
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
on rails on DIN-rail
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles with adapter
E21511
E21512
E49738
K1 K2 G50
U (e) K K G51
G49
G1
X X X
G ∅T G48
G47
Y Y
Z
98 Merlin Gerin
front panel cutouts
for fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
cutout A cutout B cutout C
E21600
E21604
E21601
E21603
A
C1 C3 C3
X X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
P5 R1 R4(3P)
R5(4P)
P6
Z
E21609
E21602
C7
X X X C21
C6 C20
Y
R6 Y
R12
P6 R7
R13
Z
dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
E29213
E29215
E29214
H1 H3 H7
X X X
H H2 H6
(a)
(b)
Y
L3 Y
P1 L5 L3
P2 L4
P4
Z
mounting
on backplate
1 pole 2 poles
E29216
K1 K1
E21506
K K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
ØT
ØT4 (c)
Y Y
1P 2P
on rails
1 pole 2 poles
E29217
K1
E21510
U (d) K
K
G1 X
X
G ØT
Y
Y
E21604
E29218
A E21601
C1 C3 C3
X X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
P5 R4(1P)
R1 R5(2P)
P6
Z
with escutcheon
E21608
E21609
C7
X X
C6
Y
R6
P6 R7
Dimensions (mm)
type H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5 P1 P2 P4 P5
NS100/160/250 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35 81 86 111 83
Dimensions (mm)
type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 ØT ØT4 U(d)
NS100/160/250 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29 58 6 22 i 32
E22046
dimensions
C801N/H to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles
E28880
E28879
E28878
H1 H3 H5
X X X
H H2 H4
(a)
Y (b) Y
P1 L L
P2 L1 L2
Z P3
P4
C801L to C1001L
3 poles 4 poles
E28879
E28881
E28878
H1 H3 H5
X X X
H H2 H4
(a)
Y (b) Y
P1 L L
P6 P2 L1 L2
Z P3
P5
K4 K10
E28882
E28883
K3 K3
K2 K9
K1 K1
∅T1 ∅T1
∅T1 ∅T1
E28884
E28885
K2 K9
K1 K1 G4 (c)
(d)
≤U
X G1 X G3 X G6 G1 X
G G2 G
G5
Y Y
K3 K3 G4
K4 K10
Y Y
K5 K5
K6 K11
K7 K7
(c) For rear connection only. K8 K12
(d) Necessary with auxiliary wire blocks only.
Dimensions (mm)
type C1 C2 C3 C4 C12 C13 C14 G G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 H H1 H2 H3
C801/1001N/H/L 164.5 235 174.5 255 57 104 61 125 240 135 272 73 28 104.5 187 374 200 400
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type H4 H5 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 L L1 L2 P1
C801/1001N/H/L 235 470 35 70 100 200 86.5 173 105 210 140 270 173 280 105 210 280 110
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type P2 P3 P4(1) P4(2) P5(1) P5(2) P6 R1 R2 R3 R4 R9 R13 R14 T1 T5 T8 U
C801/1001N/H/L 115 122 172 202 262 292 90 125 250 130.5 261 43.5 37 74 7 5 8 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
(1) Without extended toggle.
(2) With extended toggle.
R2
E28923
R14 R1
E28922
R13 ∅T5
X X C4 X C2
C13
C14
C3 C1
C12
Y
∅T8(e) R9
Z Y
P2 R3
R4
(e) For push to trip button.
dimensions
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21515
E21513
E21514
X X X
(a)
(b)
(c)
Y Y
P1 L L
P2 L1 L2
P4
Z
mounting
on backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21518
E21519
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
on rails
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
K1 K2
E21520
E21521
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y
E21795
E21796
R1
E21605
A R
C1
X X X C3
C
C2
C4
C5
R1
B
Y Y
P5 R26 R26
P6 R1 R2
Z R4 (3P)
R5 (4P)
with escutcheon
R7
E21800
R6
E21610
C7
X X
C6
C18
C19
Y
P6 R27
Z R11
Dimensions (mm)
type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2 P4 P5
NS100/160/250N/H/L 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86 111(1) 83
NS400/630N/H/L 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 107
Dimensions (mm)
type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R12 R13 R26 R27 ØT ØT4 U(e)
NS100/160/250N/H/L 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 58 43 86 14.5 29 6 22 i 32
NS400/630N/H/L 112 31.5 29 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 58 63 126 32 47 6 32 i 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
E22046
h
(a) Short terminal shields
(b) Long terminal shields ∆
(c) Phase barriers
(d) Only for rear connected circuit breaker, for 2P Note:
circuit breakers, the central drilling is not used. Door cutouts require a minimum distance between
(e) U i 20 mm when using automatic auxiliary the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge
connectors (NS100 to NS250). point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
dimensions
E21698
171
122 3 poles 4 poles
110
196
E21696
E21697
91 196
52,5 140
35 35 35 52,5
471
453
343,7
221
(✴)
291
X X X
93,7 (✴✴)
160,5
178,5
(*) 314 FC Y
316.5 RC
322.5 with connector Y
24 (**) 80.5 FC 52,5 52,5
Z1 Z2 83 RC 105 140
89 with connector
mounting
on rails
3 poles 70 4 poles
E21701
E21702
35 70
≤32 17,5 17,5
∅6
281
98,5 356
X X
62,5
137,5
Y Y
115
E21700
191
50
94
111,5
76
X X
29
86
37
Y
14,5
29
dimensions
170
E21868
122
3 poles 4 poles
110
E21866
E21867
280 280
98
78,75 210
52,5 52,5 52,5 78,75
675
527,5
(✴)
347,5
4 4
461
X X X
(*) 492.5 FC
493.5 RC
240 142,5 (✴✴) 512.5 right angle extension
536.5 edgewise terminal extension
532.5 spreaders
525 with 2 holes connector. Y
(**) 127.5 FC
128.5 RC Y
168 147.5 right angle extension 70 (78,5*) 70 (82,5*)
Z (105**) 185 (117,5**)
171.5 edgewise terminal extension 140
(157,5*) (210**) (210*) (280**)
167.5 spreaders
160 with 2 holes connector (*) Long terminal shields, 52.5 mm spacing.
mounting
on rails
3 poles 105 4 poles 105
E21871
E21872
∅6
440
160 4 540 4
X X
100
200
Y Y
22,5 22,5
45 90
273
E21870
75,25
143
4 178
X 116
X
41,5
63 147,5
37
Y
29
32
115
dimensions
3 poles 4 poles
E28888
E28887
E28886
H14
X X X
Y Y
P1 L L
P27 L1 L2
Z L11 L11
mounting
3 poles 4 poles
E28890
K38 K38
E28889
K37 K37
∅T4 K2 ∅T4 K9
K1 K1
≤U
∅T1 ∅T1
G35
X G34 X
∅T1 G ∅T1
Y Y
K3 K3
K4 K10
E28932
R30
E28931
C32
C31
X X C13
C30
Y
R13
R14
Z P2
Dimensions (mm)
type C13 C30 C31 C32 G G34 G35 H H14 K1 K2 K3 K4 K9 K10 K37
C801/1001N/H/L 104 58 211 188 125 240 520 187 642 35 70 100 200 140 270 115
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type K38 L L1 L2 L11 P1 P2 P27 R13 R14 R30 R31 T1 T4 U
C801/1001N/H/L 390 105 210 280 410 110 115 200 37 74 100 370 7 10 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
dimensions
plug-in
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
N M K1 K1
K1
E21524
E21523
E21522
Z
( )
*
P7 Y Y
L L
P8 L1 L2
P10
P9 P4
chassis
E21586
E21585
E21584
H19
X X X
H18
( ) ( )
* *
Z Y Y
P7 L6 L6
P8 L7 L9
P9 P2 P12 L8 L10
P4
mounting
through a panel M (plug-in base) through a panel M (chassis)
2P, 3P K1 4P K2 3P K1 4P K2
K K K K
E21588
E21526
E21587
E21525
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
on rails (plug-in base or chassis)
3P K21 4P K22
E21534
E21533
U K20 K20
G21 X X
G20
Y Y
∅T
E21590
K1
K K the base and the backplate (supplied with
plug-in base).
G15
X X
G14
Y Y
∅T
E21592
E21594
K K K K K K K K
∅T6
Y Y Y Y
∅T K1 K1 K1 K1 K1 ∅T5 K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
E21620
C11
X X
C17
P44
Z
Y
R8
R9
Dimensions (mm)
type C11 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 42.5 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 66 132 82 164 37.5 75 111 222 193 386 208 416 102.5 205 103.5 210 17.5 35
NS400/630N/H/L 155 55 150 300 137 274 125 250 101 202 126 252 75 150 170.5 341 283 566 293.5 587 157.5 315 140 280 22.5 45
Dimensions (mm)
type K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20 K21 K22 L L1 L2 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P2 P4
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35 70 105 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 86 111(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50 100 145 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 110 168
Dimensions (mm)
type P7 P8 P9 P10 P12 P44 R8 R9 U(2) ØT ØT5 ØT6 Note:
NS100/160/250N/H/L 27 45 75 64 32 123 74 148 i 32 6 24 30 Door cutouts require a minimum distance between
NS400/630N/H/L 27 45 100 86 32 147 90 180 i 32 6 33 33
the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge
point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
(2) U i 20 mm when using automatic auxiliary connectors (NS100 to NS250).
dimensions
C801N/H to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles
E28893
P10
P7 P9
P8
E28892
E28891
H7
X X X
H6
Z Y Y
P11 D L3 L3
L4 L5
C801L to C1001L
3 poles 4 poles
P13
E28894
P12 P9
P6 P8
E28892
E28891
H7
X X X
H6
Z Y Y
P14 D L3 L3
L4 L5
rear mounting
C801N/H/L to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles
K14 K15
E28898
E28897
E28902
G7 G7
G9
G12
Y Y
G11
Y Y
K18 K18
K17 K20
K16 K16
(c) For rear connection only. K19 K21
(d) Necessary with auxiliary wire blocks only.
E28900
E28895
E28896
K22 ∅T2 ∅T1 K22 ∅T2
≤U
G14 G14
Z G16 Z Z G16 Z
G15 G15
Y Y
Y Y
K22 K22
K23 K24
R19
R18
R17 R2
E28926
R16 ∅T5 R1
∅T11 R15
X C22 X C16 C4 X C2
C20
C21 C19 C15
C3 C1
C23 C17 C23
C17
Dimensions (mm)
type C1 C2 C3 C4 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 G7 G8 G9
C801/1001N/H/L 164.5 235 174.5 255 75 137 208 45 61 109 80 147 185.5 94 97.5 182.5 137
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 H6 H7 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 K18 K19 K20
C801/1001N/H/L 274 66 36 110 9 103 170 254.8 462 70 140 210 103 186 93 206 256
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type K21 K22 K23 K24 L3 L4 L5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P47
C801/1001N/H/L 276 108 216 286 147 277 347 90 75 43 202 335 305 165 425 395 157
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type R1 R2 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 R21 R22 R23 R24 T1 T2 T5 T11 U
C801/1001N/H/L 125 250 44 88 61 122 66 132 125 250 130.5 261 7 8,5 5 4 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
key D
Ronis 34
Profalux 41
Castell 72
Merlin Gerin 113
Compact: installation
Compact C801 to C1251
withdrawable on horizontal standard chassis
dimensions
C801N/H to C1251N/H
3 poles
E28904
≤P23
E28903
H12
X X
H11
H10
Z (b) Y L9
P7 P1 P15 L10
P21
P22
4 poles
E28907
E28906
H13
X X
H10
Z (b) Y L9
L10
Note:
P22 = 337 mm with extended toggle. (b) Short terminal shields compulsory.
C801L to C1001L
3 poles
E28905
≤P23
E28903
H12
H11 X X
H10
Z Y
P6 P1 P15 (b) L9
P24 L10
P25
P26
4 poles
E28908
E28906
H13
X X
H10
Z (b) Y L9
L10
Note:
P26 = 427 mm with extended toggle. (b) Short terminal shields compulsory.
E28910
K34
K33
K30 K29 K30
E28909
K28 ∅T3
∅T3
Y Y
K35
K36
Note:
Maximum thickness of the plate: 3 mm
mounting on rails
C801N/H/L to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles
∅T3
E28912
K32
E28911
∅T3 K31
X G29 X G33
G28 G28
≤U Y ≤U Y
R27
R26
R25
R17
E28927
∅T11
X C29 X C25
C27
C28 C26 C19
Z
P48 Y
Dimensions (mm)
type C19 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33
C801/1001N/H/L 61 122 44 88 66 132 77 154 93 186 103 206 70 140 256 276 224 210
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type H10 H11 H12 H13 K28 K29 K30 K31 K32 K33 K34 K35 K36 L9 L10 P1 P6 P7
C801/1001N/H/L 120 240 290 310 137 274 66 90 180 226.5 453 76.5 150 266 532 110 90 75
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type P15 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P48 R17 R25 R26 R27 R28 R29 T3 T11 U
C801/1001N/H/L 42 135 307 3 165 225 397 160 61 109 75 137 80 147 6 4 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Merlin Gerin 115
Compact: installation
Compact C801 to C1251
withdrawable on vertical standard chassis
dimensions
C801N/H to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles
E28915
≤P23
E28913
E28914
X X
H9
H8
(b)
Z Y
L6 L6
P7 P1 P15 L7 L8
P16
P17
Note:
P17 = 335 mm with extended toggle. (b) Short terminal shields compulsory.
C801L to C1001L
3 poles 4 poles
E28916
≤P23
E28913
E28914
X X
H9
H8
(b)
Z Y
P6 P1 P15 L6 L6
P18 L7 L8
P19
P20
Note:
P20 = 425 mm with extended toggle. (b) Short terminal shields compulsory.
mounting on backplate
C801N/H/L to C1251N/H
3 poles 4 poles
K26 K27
E28917
E28918
K25 K25
∅T3 ∅T3
G11
G17 G13
X G21 X
G9 G18 G7
G11
Y Y
K18 K18
K17 K20
K16 K16
K19 K21
Note:
Maximum thickness of the plate: 3 mm
∅T3 K9 ∅T3
E28919
E28920
K15
K2 K2
≤U
X G20 X
G19
Y Y
R20
E28930
R19
R18
E28929
R17
R16
R15
∅T11
X C22 X C16
C20
C21 C19 C15
Z
P48
Dimensions (mm)
type C15 C16 C19 C20 C21 C22 G7 G9 G11 G13 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 H8 H9 K2
C801/1001N/H/L 75 137 61 109 80 147 120.5 137 66 110 274 20.5 90 180 250 207.5 415 70
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type K9 K15 K16 K17 K18 K19 K20 K21 K25 K26 L6 L7 L8 P1 P6 P7 P15 P16
C801/1001N/H/L 140 210 103 186 93 206 256 276 52.5 105 146 292 362 110 90 75 42 133
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type P17 P18 P19 P20 P23 P48 R15 R16 R17 R18 R19 R20 T3 T11 U
C801/1001N/H/L 305 165 223 395 3 160 44 88 61 122 66 132 6 4 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
dimensions
plug-in
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21537
N M
E21535
K1 K1 K1
E21536
) (
*
H17 G11
X X X
H16 G10
( )
Y Y
*
P7 L L
P8 L1 L2
P9 P4
Z
mounting
through a backplate M (plug-in base) through a backplate M (chassis)
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles
K1 K2 K1 K2
K K K K
E21588
E21526
E21587
E21525
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
K21 K22
E21534
E21533
U K20 K20
G21 X X
G20
Y Y
∅T
E21813
R8
E21623
C11
X X
C16
C17
C13
Y
P44 R33
Z R34
Dimensions (mm)
type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G20 G21 H16 H17 K K1
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 82.5 55 42.5 95 190 87 174 37.5 75 102.5 205 17.5 35
NS400/630N/H/L 155 82 122.5 42 150 300 137 274 75 150 157.5 315 22.5 45
Dimensions (mm)
type K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20 K21 K22 L L1 L2 P4
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35 70 105 52.5 105 140 111(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50 100 145 70 140 185 168
Dimensions (mm)
type P7 P8 P9 P44 R8 R9 R33 R34 ØT U(2)
NS100/160/250N/H/L 27 45 75 123 74 148 74 148 6 i 32
NS400/630N/H/L 27 45 100 147 90 180 74 148 6 i 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
(2) U i 20 mm when using automatic auxiliary connectors (NS100 to NS250).
E22046
Note:
Door cutouts require a minimum distance between
the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge
point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
dimensions
3 poles 4 poles
E21599
E21597
E21598
H20
H22
H21 X
X X
H23
Y Y
L L
L12 L2
L11
P33 L1
P32
Z
E21813
R8
E21612
E21621
E21614
C11
X X C23 X X
C16
C22 C17
Y C13
R14
R15
Y
P45 P45 R33
Z
Z R34
Dimensions (mm)
type C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 H20 H21 H22 H23 L L1
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 82 56 42.5 29 76 62.5 97 45.5 73 52.5 105
NS400/630N/H/L 155 82 122.5 42 41.5 126 100 152 83 123 70 140
Dimensions (mm)
type L2 L11 L12 P32 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34
NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 91 45.5 178 143 145 74 148 48.5 97 74 148
NS400/630N/H/L 185 123 61.5 250 215 217 90 180 64.5 129 74 148
E22046
Note:
Door cutouts require a minimum distance between
the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge
point ∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
dimensions
T801…1251 TS801…1251
E28942
E28943
E28946
E28947
H22 H24
X X X X
H21 H23
P40 Y Y
L P42 L
Z
Z P39 L1 P41 L1
P38
R12
R11 R11
C9 X C11
X
C8 C10
Dimensions (mm)
type C8 C9 C10 C11 H21 H22 H23 H24 L L1 P38 P39 P40 P41 P42 R11 R12
C801/1001N/H/L 70 183 79 219 76.5 214 76 194 105 210 263.5 234.5 158.5 220 110 107.5 215
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
dimensions
3 poles 4 poles
E21627
E21625
L12
E21626
I
60° I
H24 60°
H23
DD
X DD X
H20 60° O
X 60° O
E21805
E21614
E21615
X X C23 X X C23
C22
C4
C22
Y C5
P43 R14
Z R15
Y
Z P43 R26
R1
R14
R15
E21813
R9
E21620
E21622
R8
C11 C11
X X X X
C16
C17 C17
C13
P44
Z
Y Y
R8 P44 R33
R9 Z R34
Front panel escutcheon compulsory. Collar for Vigi module, front panel escutcheons for Vigi module and
rotary handle compulsory.
L7
L12
E21632
E21634
H24 H10
G39
X
X H9 G38
11 àto33maxi
maxi Y
P42±2 Y K14
K15
E21628
E21630
L14
E21629
L13
L12
10 60°
I
H24 H26
X X
O
X H25
60°
Y
P38 P40
Z Z
45°
L12
∅T7
H24
∅T6
G36
G37 Y
Dimensions (mm)
type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H20 H23 H24
NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 37 103 82.5 55 42.5 29 76 36 72 41 100 60 120 28 73 9
NS400/630N/H/L 147.5 37 155 82 122.5 42 41.5 126 36 72 51 145 83 160 40 123 24.5
Dimensions (mm)
type H25 H26 K14 K15 L L1 L2 L7 L8 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36
NS100/160/250N/H/L 37.5 75 50 100 52.5 105 140 69 120 91 9.25 37.5 75 55 121 155 156
NS400/630N/H/L 37.5 75 72.5 145 70 140 185 85 160 123 5 37.5 75 66.5 145 179 180
Dimensions (mm)
type P37 P38(1) P40(1) P42 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R26 R33 R34 ØT6 ØT7
NS100/160/250N/H/L 164 u 185 u 248 125 89 123 29 74 148 48.5 97 14.5 74 148 4.2 50
NS400/630N/H/L 188 u 209 u 272 149 112 147 29 90 180 64.5 129 32 74 148 4.2 50
(1) i 600 mm.
Note
Door cutouts require a minimum distance between the center of the circuit breaker and the door hinge point
∆ u 100 + (h x 5).
E28934
60° H15 H16
X X
H18
H17
32°
Y
L12 L
P1 P31 L1
P28
Z P29 P30
R2
E28935
R1
∅T5
C4 X C2
C3 C1
Y
R3
R4
E28937
P1 d(*) P33 P32 L14
E28938
R7
R6
R5
Y ∅T7(f)
R8
P35
Y
P1 d(*) P34 L12 L
Z F1 L13 (f) Only required when mounting behind a door
E28940
E28941
R5
∅T9
60°
C(*) ∅T8 C(*)
X X X
32°
Y
R9
R10
P37
Z Y
P1 d(*) L12
F
Dimensions (mm)
type C(*) C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 H15 H16 H17 H18 H19 H20 L L1
C801/1001N/H/L 13.5 164.5 235 174.5 255 70 35 38.5 13.5 200.5 77.5 123 53 103.5 105 210
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type L12 L13 L14 P1 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 R1 R2
C801/1001N/H/L 73.5 63 104 110 112 229.5 25 54 39 86 42 64 63.5 19.5 125 250
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 T3 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9
C801/1001N/H/L 130.5 261 73.5 47 73 30 43.5 87 6 5 68 6.5 8 35.5
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type F mini F maxi F1 mini F1 maxi
short shaft long shaft short shaft long shaft short shaft long shaft short shaft long shaft
C801/1001N/H/L 209 333 333 523 251 375 375 565
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
(*) To compensate for the vertical play of the shaft as a Vertical play can be eliminated by using the shaft
fonction of distance d, dimension C is to be increased by: bracket, to be fitted on the circuit breaker.
c 1 mm for 76 i d i 120;
c 2 mm for 120 i d i 160;
c 3 mm for 160 i d i 200.
dimensions
circuit breaker with ammeter module circuit breaker with current transformer module
E21516
E21517
X X
P1 P1
P2 P2
P48 P4
Z
P47
Z
mounting
on backplate
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21519
E21518
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
on rails
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
E21521
E21520
K1 K2
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y
E21674
C29
C30
C1
X X
C
C28
C27
Y
P6 R
Z R1
R16
R17
E21677
E21678
C29
C30
C23
X X
C22
C28
C27
Y
R16
P43
Z R17
R14
R15
Dimensions (mm)
type C C1 C22 C23 C27 C28 C29 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9
NS100/160/250N/H/L 28 76 28 76 56.5 124 30 78.5 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 41.5 126 56.5 185.5 30 122 100 200 200 300 213.5 327
Dimensions (mm)
type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 P1 P2 P4
NS100/160/250N/H/L 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 81 86 111(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 95.5 110 168
Dimensions (mm)
type P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1 R14 R15 R16 R17 ØT ØT4 U(e)
NS100/160/250N/H/L 88 89 137 128 14.5 29 48.5 97 46.5 93 6 22 i 32
NS400/630N/H/L 112 112 162 154 31.5 63 64.5 129 64.5 93 6 32 i 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS 250N/H/L.
extended escutcheons
for toggle
E21635
E21637
E21636
A D
E21640
E21464
E21639
52,4
91 35 53
63
toggle cover
E21653
E21654
E21655
M8
A3 D3
E21642
E21643
M2 M3
A1 D1 D2
E21645
E21646
79 64
69 3,5 6,5
E21649
E21648
M6 M7
A2 D1 D2
E21652
E21651
93,5 80,5
Dimensions (mm)
type A A1 A2 A3 D D1 D2 D3 M M2 M3 M6 M7 M8
NS100/160/250N/H/L 91 69 157 94 35 3.5 6.5 40 73 115 102 114 101 94
NS400/630N/H/L 123 102 189 35 134 3.5 6.5 60 123 155 142 164 151 134
E21661
E21659
185
9*
24,6** 75
175
150
X X
87,5
Y
9,25 9,25 61,5
325
185 46,5
133* 295
157**
Z
E21684
E21683
X X X
Y Y Y
L16 L L16 L
P5 L17 L18
Z
C3 C3
X X
C2 C2
Y Y Y Y
R2 R19 R2 R18 R19 R2
Dimensions (mm)
type C2 C3 L L16 L17 L18 R2 R18 R19 P5
NS100/160/250N/H/L 54 108 52.5 140 245 280 54 89 140 83
NS400/630N/H/L 92.5 184 70 185 325 370 71.5 116.5 185 107
E28958
R34
E28957
R32 R33
H27
C34
X X H26 X
H25 C33
Y Y
Y Y
L12 L12
P44 L18 L17
P43 P32 L19
Z
mounting on blackplate
3 poles 4 poles
E28960
≤U ≤U
X G1 X G1
G G
Y Y Y Y
K39 K39
Dimensions (mm)
type C33 C34 G G1 H25 H26 H27 K13 K14 K15 K39 L12
C801/1001N/H/L 81.5 170 125 240 86.5 180 200.5 70 140 210 290 73.5
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type L17 L18 L19 P32 P43 P44 R32 R33 R34 T1 U
C801/1001N/H/L 290 133.5 530 39 229.5 184 128.5 290 520 7 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
base plate
dimensions, 3 poles or 4 poles
Fixed device Plug-in device
∅T9
E33351
E33349
E33350
Z
( )
*
∅T10
P54
H46 P7
Y Y P8
Z
L31 K25 P33 P9
L32 P50 P32
P52
mounting
Vertically mounted devices Horizontally mounted devices
X
E33357
E33356
Y G51
X
K35
G50
K25
Y Y
Y K25
K35
K36
U
G50
G51
Dimensions (mm)
type G50 G51 H20 H21 H22 H23 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 K25 K35 K36
NS100/160/250N/H/L 138 285 62.5 97 45.5 73 60 120 145 300 30.5 156 246.5 300
NS400/630N/H/L 180 360 100 152 83 123 60 120 189 378 68.5 210 318.5 400
Dimensions (mm)
type L31 L32 P7 P8 P9 P32 P33 P50 P52 P54 ØT9 ØT10 U
NS100/160/250N/H/L 110.5 354 27 45 75 178 143 23 85 21 9 6 i 32
NS400/630N/H/L 150.5 466 27 45 100 250 215 23 99 21 9 6 i 32
base plate
dimensions, 3 poles or 4 poles
∅T9
E33360
∅T10 ∅T10
H45
H43 H43
X
H46
Y Y
L31 K25
L32
E33362
H22 H20
X
H23
X
P54
Z
P33 P7
P50 P32 P8
P52 P9 (*) Short terminal shields obligatory.
mounting
Vertically mounted device Horizontally mounted devices
X
E33368
E33367
Y
G51
X
K35
G50
K25 K36
Y Y Y
K25
K35
K36
U
G50
G51
Note:
Dimensions see page 132
Merlin Gerin 133
Compact: installation
automatic source-changeover system
Compact C801 to C1251
base plate
dimensions 3 poles or 4 poles
Fixed device
E33372
E33371
H28 G41 G57
H43 X X
H42
H29 G40 G56
K45 Y Y P46
K46 P45 P38
L21 L20 Z
L23
mounting
Vertically mouted devices Horizontally mounted devices
E28953
E28952
ØT10 ØT10
G38
Y G41
G40
G36
Y Y
Y ≤U
K45 K44
K46
G37
≤U
X
K41
K42
Dimensions (mm)
type G36 G37 G38 G40 G41 G56 G57 H28 H29 H42 H43 K41
C801/1001N/H/L 286 187 625 179 350 204 400 480 241 60 120 204
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
Dimensions (mm)
type K42 K44 K45 K46 L20 L21 L23 P38 P45 P46 ØT10 U
C801/1001N/H/L 400 286 187 625 286 202 655 263.5 20 3 8.1 32
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
E33353
E33352
11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
10
9
8
7
H48
6
5
H47
4
3
2
1
H43 H49
N
L33 P58
L34 P62
L35
P60
E33354
E33364
E33363
H51
H50
C34
H52
L36 P61
L37 P59 C34
P63
Dimensions (mm)
type C34 H43 H47 H48 H49 H50 H51 H52 L33 L34 L35 L36 L37
NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 120 150 137 160 200 255 22 6 48 83 138 150
NS400/630N/H/L
C801/1001N/H/L
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
97 97
E38894
E38893
48,5 48,5
X
X 76
29
Y Y
NS100 156 NS100
to to
Z NS250 NS250
145
E38896
64,5 64,5
X 126
X
41,5
Y Y
NS400 210 NS400
to to
NS630 NS630
Z
217
E38898
E38897
64,5
126
X
X
41,5
Y Y
NS400 210 NS100
to to
NS630 NS250
Z
217
215 215
E38900
E38899
107,5 107,5
183
X X
70
Y Y
C801 C801
286 to
to
C1251 C1251
Z
254
E23950
Comes equipped with bare NS80H-MA/NSC100N
Compact NS80H-MA/NSC100N cable connectors. L (mm) 16
Accessories: long terminal
S (mm2) 1.5…70
shields.
L torque (Nm) 4 (S i 6 mm2)
E23949
5 (S > 4 mm2)
S cables copper or aluminium
i 160A i 250A
OFF
added directly to the terminals. L (mm) 20 20
Material: steel up to 160 A,
S Cu cable (mm2) 1.5…95 10…16 25…35
push
tinned aluminium up to 250 A.
S Al cable (mm2)
to
1.5…95 25…35
trip
NS400/630
fitted on the terminals. 1 cable L (mm) 20
Material: tinned aluminium.
S (mm2) 35…300
Accessories: phase barriers
torque (Nm) 31
or long terminal shields
2 cables L (mm) 30…60
E22041
standard.
E25972
E50702
E22040
E25969/B
E35577
Compact NS100/250
Material: tinned copper.
E50702
bars L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
L L I (mm) 20 i I i 25 20 i I i 25 30 i I i 34
e d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 15
e (mm) i6 i6 3 i e i 10
Ø (mm) >6 >8 > 10.5
lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
(1) For tightening to the terminals.
c specific: NS400/630
(pole distance 52.5 only).
E50702
d
push
to
trip
l NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
L L bars L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 40
e
l (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 20
e (mm) i6 i6 3 i e i 10
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 12.5
lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 40
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 12.5
torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
(1) For tightening to the terminals.
E30907
phase barriers c supplied with snap-on and screw-on bare c horizontal or vertical position,
cable connectors, distribution connectors, c can be replaced by long terminal shields.
lugs, right-angle terminal extensions, straight
E28013
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
2 lengths 4 positions
E50702
E25967
by bare cable For Compact NS100/250, the rear The use of short terminal shields is
connectors can be equipped with add-on recommended.
(copper or aluminium) bare cable connectors.
E25969
E25969/B
push
to
trip
Connections are made to the vertical to the terminals of the plug-in base.
terminals of the plug-in base.
l (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 15
400 Ø e (mm) i6 i6 3 i e i 10
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
d
push
to
trip
l lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
L L Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
torque (Nm) (1) 5 5 20
e
(1) For tightening to the terminals.
E26411
torque (Nm) 26
shields or barriers.
Refer to drawings pages 150 and 151. In such case, the use of the insulating
screen (supplied with the plug-in base)
The terminals of the plug-in base can be between the front panel and the plug-in base
equipped with bare cable connectors. is compulsory.
For Compact NS630 spreaders can be fitted The use of short terminal shields is
to the terminals of the plug-in base. compulsory.
push
to
trip
Refer to drawings page 111. horizontal terminals of the plug-in base can
Connections must be made to the long be equipped with add-on bare cable
insulated horizontal terminals connectors.
(2 positions: inside or outside) which replace
the standard terminals of the plug-in base. The use of short terminal shields is
Refer to drawings pages 150 and 151 . compulsory.
E23961
E23963
E23980
E23981
E23962
E23969
1 2
copper or aluminium
E24097
E23968
1 2
58 38
1-3 cable connector 1-4 cable connector
70 mm2 i CSA i 185 mm2 70 mm2 i CSA i 240 mm2
Tightening torque: 31 Nm. Tightening torque: 42 Nm. S S
M10
E23971
20 41 10
80
E23975
E23976
E23965
M12
E23964
M12
Ø11
Ø11
M10x40 12,5 M10x40
M10x40 25
≤50
= M10x40
= 25
≤50 12,5 12,5
The additional connectors are suitable
Connection to flat or edgewise bars, for 1 to 4 cables with crimped lugs
depending on how the terminals are installed. (CSA i 300 mm2).
E23961
E23967
Ø11
Ø11
12,5
25
≤50
M10x40
= 25 =
M10x40
≤50 12,5 12,5
Connection to flat or edgewise bars, depending
on how the terminals are installed.
M12
M10x40 M12
M10x40
E43367
insulated part
Isolant part
E43368
insulated part
Ø11
Cache-bornes 500 mm
(*) terminal
Terminal shields
shields mini
12,5
500 mm
mini =
= 25
E i 50
E43370
P21
P13
E21747
G4
X X
G5
G19
Y
Z K1 K1 K1
front connections
standard terminal
E35578
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E21750
Z
E21554
Z
10,5
14
70 113,5
X
X
Z Z
E21752
Z
E21751
46,5
19 14
70 113,5 113,5
X
X X
rear connections
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
E21755
E21756
E21561
10 15 ∅13 ∅23,2
∅8,6 ∅20
13 14
18 30
70
50 short RC 113,5
43 short RC
88 long RC X 115 long RC X
Z Z
6 8
E35580
E21556
E21563 37,5 4
39,5(b)
41 Z
20,5 30
70 70
Z
X X
NS400/630 NS400/630
F vue F
E21754
8
E21758
61
Z
Z 58
42
34
8
113,5 113,5
X X
E21566
X K10 K9
E21558
E21557
K8 K8 K8 K8 K8
70
G27
G26
41
X X
64,5
66,5(b)
Z
Y Y
Dimensions (mm)
type G4 G5 G19 G26 G27 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P21
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 140 215 30 41 35 45 159 114 19.5(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 113.5 227 327 39 54 45 52.5 187.5 135 26 44
52,5 67,5 70 240 170
(1) P13 = 21.5 mm for NS250N/H/L and Vigi MH module.
front connections
3 poles 4 poles
E28961
P49 K2 K2 K2
E28962
K52
K51
G50 K50
M10 K49
X X
G44
G51
C801N to C1251N
with Visu module
K2 K2 K2 K53
E28967
P52
E28966
K50
K50
∅T14 K49
G44
G53
G52
X X
G44
M10 K49
Y K50
Z K51
K52
E28964
P50 P6
E28965
P50
G50
∅T12 P51
Z
X X X
G47
G51 G45
G48 G46
Y Z Z
Dimensions (mm)
type G44 G45 G46 G47 G48 G50 G51 K2 K49 K50 K51 K52 K53 M10 P6 P49 P50 P51 P52 T12 T14
C801/1001N/H/L 15 12.5 25 22 44 170 340 70 12.5 25 22.5 45 50 M10 90 25 13 15 47.5 10.6 12.2
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
E21569
E21570
X X
Z Y
front connections
standard terminals
NS400/630
E21571
P21 E
Z
G32
G32 G31
195,5
G31
210,5
X X
( )
* 68
Z
E21581
P28
G31
G32
G34 202
X X
E21942
83
P29
E21582
P30
Z
G32
G34
X 66 X
94
(*) Short terminal shields compulsory.
rear connections
mounting through a backplate or on rails
P22 Z
E21573
E21574
( ) P23
*
E
G35 P24
G33 P25
mounting on a backplate
E21577
P26 Z
P27
G33
E21579
*
P26 Z
P27
E
G35
on universal chassis
C801N/H - C1251N/H C801L - C1001L
rear connections
P53 P53 P6
E28969
E28970
K2 K2 K2
E28968
X X X
G47
G45
G51
G48 G46
Y Z Z
E28973
E28972
E28971
G49 G49
G49 G49
X X X
G49 G49
Y K47 Z Z
K48
∅T13 P54
G47
G45
G48 G46
E28975
P53
E28976
P53 P6
K2 K2 K2
E28974
X X X
G47
G51 G45
G48 G46
Y Z Z
Dimensions (mm)
type G45 G46 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 K2 K47 K48 P6 P53 P54 T13
C801/1001N/H/L 12.5 25 22 44 70 170 340 70 170 340 90 119 14 11
C1251N/H
C801/1251NI
symbols
ACP : auxiliaries control plate MX : shunt release Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
BA : controller MT : motor mechanism module BK : black
BL : blue
BP : latching "off" push-button O : opening order
GN : green
BP1 : SDTAM reset button OF1/ : changeover switch GY : grey
CAF1/ : early-make switch of rotary handle OF2/ OR : orange
CAF2 OF3 RD : red
ON : QN-opening order VT : violet
CAO : early-break switch of rotary handle
WH : white
(convertible to CAF) OR : QR-opening order
YE : yellow
CAO1 : early-break switch of rotary handle Options:
CD : disconnected position indication C : communication (COM) Note:
contact F : fault indications All diagrams are shown with circuits “de-
R : load monitoring energised”, all devices “open” and relays in
CE : connected position indication T : residual current type earth “normal” position.
contact fault protection
F : closing order Z : zone selective interlocking
F1 : breaker for the protection of Q : Compact breaker
auxiliary circuits Q1 : circuit breaker supplying and
FN : QN-closing order protecting the automatic control
FR : QR-closing order circuits for the "Normal" source
H1 : tripped position signal lamp Q2 : circuit breaker supplying and
protecting the automatic control
H2 : motor mechanism in manual
circuits for the "Replacement"
position signal lamp
source
IN : QN-closing order
QN : normal-source circuit breaker
IR : QR-closing order
QR : replacement-source circuit breaker
IVE : terminal block and electrical
R : reset order
interlocking unit
RHK : bistable relay Telemecanique:
KA1/ : auxiliary relay
RHK-41…
KA2/
KA3 RN : QN-breaker reset order
KM1 : power contactor RR : QN-breaker reset order
KT : forced operation on replacement- SD : trip indication switch
source control signal SDE : fault indication switch
KR : additional check before transfer SDTAM : thermal fault early break signal
KG : engine-generator set control signal SDV : earth fault indication switch
L1 : "normal" source fault indication SH : load-shedding control signal
lamp UA : controller
L2 : "replacement" source fault
UN : normal-source voltage
indication lamp
UR : replacement-source voltage
MN : undervoltage release
RD
WH
E43821
E43822
VT
YE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 12 14
déclencheur
trip unit
MN (1)
MX SD
D4 C2 91 11 11
WH
RD
GY
(1) MN or MX
with MN with MX
E43823
E43824
CN1 - CN 1 + CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 – CN2 - CN 2 –
F1 F1
ordre de
tripping order
déclenchement tripping
ordre de
H1 déclenchement
order H1
D1 92 94 D1 92 94
Q Q
déclencheur
trip unit trip unit
déclencheur
MN MX
SD SD
D4 91 D4 91
Symbols Note:
Q : Compact NS Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all devices "open" and relays in
"normal" position.
SD : trip indication switch
OF1 : changeover switch
MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
CAO1 : early-break switch of rotary handle
CAF1/CAF2 : early-make switch of rotary handle
F1 : breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 : tripped position signal lamp
WH
VT
VT
E18916
RD
YE
VT
SDE : fault indication switch
314 312 352 354 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 82 84
SDV : earth fault indication switch
OF1/ : changeover switches
OF2
WH
GN
GN
RD
RD
YE
YE
VT
VT
CE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 72 74 82 84 MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module
CAF1/ : early-make switch of rotary handle
Q OF1 OF2 CAF1 CAF2 CAO1
CAF2
déclencheur
CAO1 : early-break switch of rotary handle
trip unit
SDE CE : connected positon indication
MN (1) (2)
contact
MX SD CD : disconnected position indication
Id
SDV
contact
(1) : MN or MX.
D4 C2 91 11 21 71 81
(2) : for the withdrawable or plug-in versions, SDV
OR
GY
GY
BK
BL
BL
RD
GY
YE
YE
correct operation.
Note:
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
BK : black
GY
GY
E18917
VT
VT
BL : blue
314 312 352 354 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 84 A2 A4 B4 GN : green
GY : grey
GN (3) OR : orange
WH
GN
WH
RD
YE
YE
OR
BL
VT
VT
CE
RD : red
RD
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 72 74 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
VT : violet
WH : white
YE : yellow
Q OF1 OF2
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MN (1) (2)
MX SD
BK (3)
Id
SDV
D4 C2 91 11 21 71 81 A1 L1
GN
OR
GY
GY
BK
BL
BL
CD
311 351 D4 C2 91 11 21 A1 L1
YE
YE
E43817
11 12 14 21 22 24
71 72 74 B4 24 84 D4 14 94
74
91 92 94 81 82 84
A1 L1 A4 22 82 C2 12 92
72 L1
A2 21 81 D1 11 91
71 A1 C1
D1 C2 D4 A2 A4 B4
C1
WH
VT
VT
RD
YE
VT
E22042
GN
GN
RD
RD
BK
YE
YE
YE
VT
VT
VT
CE
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 72 74 82 84 OF2/
OF3
MN : undervoltage release
Q OF1 OF2 OF3 CAF1 CAF2 CAO1
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module
déclencheur (3)
trip unit (3) CAF1/ : early-make switch of rotary handle
SDE
MN (1) (2) CAF2
MX SD CAO1 : early-break switch of rotary handle
Id
SDV
CE : connected positon indication
contact
21 31
D4 C2 91 11 71 81
CD : disconnected position indication
WH
RD
OR
GY
GY
GY
BL
BL
BL
contact
CD
-
(1) : MN or MX.
311 351 Z12 e T2 D4 C2 91 11 21 31 81
(2) : for the withdrawable or plug-in versions, SDV
WH
RD
GY
YE
YE
circuit breaker with motor mechanism (4) : wires supplied, must be connected to ensure
correct operation.
GY
GY
VT
VT
E22043
Note:
314 312 352 354 Z11 e+ T1 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 84 A2 A4 B4 Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
GN (4)
WH
GN
OR
GN
WH
RD
YE
BK
YE
YE
OR
BL
VT
VT
VT
CE
Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
RD
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 72 74 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
BK : black
BL : blue
Q OF1 OF2 OF3
GN : green
GY : grey
trip unit (3)
déclencheur (3)
MT
OR : orange
SDE
MN (1) (2) RD : red
MX SD VT : violet
BK (4)
Id
SDV
WH : white
YE : yellow
D4 C2 91 11 21 31 71 81 A1 L1
WH
GN
OR
GY
GY
GY
RD
BK
BL
BL
BL
CD
YE
E43819
11 12 14 21 22 24 31 32 34 _
71 72 74 T2 34 e
R2
_
91 92 94 81
A1
82
L1
84 Z11 e+ e T1 32 e+
R1
Z12 31 Z11
B4 24 84 D4 14 94
74
D1 C2 D4 A2 A4 B4 Z12 T1 T2
C1 R1 R2 A4 22 82 C2 12 92
72 L1
Fixed part (front view / looking into base) 21 81 D1
A2 71 A1 C1 11 91
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 – MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module
F1
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
and MN/MX
H1 : tripped position signal lamp
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
F O
H1
signal lamp
H2
ordre de
tripping order
déclenchement
F : closing order orders
(2) O : opening order should not be
D1 A2 A4 B4
(must be >150 ms) simultaneous
(1) : wires supplied, must be connected to ensure
correct operation.
RD
GN (1)
WH
WH
OR
BL
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
Q
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
déclencheur
MT devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
trip unit
SDE
RD : red
WH: white
D4 A1 L1
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
F O
H1 H2
ordretripping
de
déclenchement
order (2)
(2)
C1 A2 A4 B4
RD
GN (1)
WH
WH
OR
BL
C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MX
BK (1)
C2 81 A1 L1
OR
GN
BK
C2 A1 L1
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 – MT : motor mechanism module
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
F1
H1 : tripped position signal lamp
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
signal lamp
F : closing order orders
O : opening order should not be
(must be >150 ms) simultaneous
F O
H1
H2 (1) : wires supplied, must be connected to ensure
A2 A4 B4 correct operation.
Note:
RD
GN (1)
WH
OR
BL
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
carried out locally and manually.
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
Q
Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
MT
déclencheur
trip unit BK : black
SDE
BL : blue
GN : green
BK (1) OR : orange
RD : red
81 A1 L1 WH: white
GN
BK
A1 L1
E43839
1 2 F O F O
vérouillage
locked by par locked by par
vérouillage
tripping
l'ordre de tripping
l'ordre de
order
déclenchement order
déclenchement
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 81 82 81
without auxiliary
E43840
E43841
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 81 82 81
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 – MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module
F1
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
and MN/MX
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
signal lamp
R F O
R : load monitoring
H2
ordre de
tripping order
déclenchement
option
(3)
(3) (must be >150 ms) orders
D1 84 A2 A4 B4
F : closing order should not be
O : opening order simultaneous
(must be >150 ms)
WH
WH
RD
OR
(1)
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
(1) : wires supplied, must be connected to ensure
correct operation.
(2) : connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary
Q connector terminal 84.
MT
(3) : tripping order must lock out closing order.
déclencheur
trip unit
(2) SDE
MN
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
D4
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
81 A1 L1
GN
BK
BL
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
R F O
H2
ordre de
tripping
déclenchement
(3) order (3)
C1 84 A2 A4 B4
WH
WH
RD
OR
BL
(1)
C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
(2) SDE
MX
C1 81 A1 L1
OR
GN
BK
C2 A1 L1
CN1
CN2 - CN2 – MT : motor mechanism module
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
F1
motor mechanism module circuits
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
signal lamp
R : load monitoring
option
R F O (must be >150 ms) orders
H2 F : closing order should not be
O : opening order simultaneous
(must be >150 ms)
84 A2 A4 B4
F order has priority
(1) : wires supplied, must be connected to ensure
correct operation.
WH
RD
OR
BL
(1)
82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
(2) : connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary
connector terminal 84.
Note:
Q
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
MT carried out locally and manually.
trip unit
déclencheur
(2) SDE Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
GN : green
OR : orange
A1 L1
RD : red
WH: white
1 2 F O F O
R R
locked by par
vérouillage vérouillage
locked by par
trippingde
l'ordre trippingde
l'ordre
order
déclenchement order
déclenchement
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
without auxiliary
E43917
E43916
1 2 F O F O
R R
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
CN1
CN2 - CN2 – MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module
F1
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
and MN/MX
H1 : electrical fault signal lamp
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
F O
H1 H2
signal lamp
ordre de
tripping
déclenchement F : closing order orders
order
O : opening order should not be
D1 84 A2 A4 B4 (must be >150 ms) simultaneous
F order has priority
(1) (2) : required to ensure correct indication of an
WH
OR
WH
RD
BL
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
electrical fault.
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
Q
carried out locally and manually.
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
trip unit
déclencheur
MT devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
SDE
(2)
MN Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
(1) BK : black
BL : blue
D4 81 A1 L1
GN : green
OR : orange
GN
BK
BL
RD : red
WH: white
D4 A1 L1
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
F O
H1 H2
ordre de
tripping
déclenchement
order
C1 84 A2 A4 B4
WH
OR
WH
RD
BL
C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
déclencheur
SDE
(2)
MX
(1)
C2 81 A1 L1
GN
OR
BK
C2 A1 L1
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
MT : motor mechanism module
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
F1
H1 : electrical fault signal lamp
H2 : motor mechanism in manual position
signal lamp
F : closing order
F O
O : opening order orders
H1 H2 (must be >150 ms) should not be
F order has priority simultaneous
(1) (2) : required to ensure correct indication of an
84 A2 A4 B4 electrical fault.
Note:
WH
OR
RD
BL
MT
Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
trip unit
déclencheur
BK : black
SDE
(2)
BL : blue
(1)
GN : green
OR : orange
RD : red
81 A1 L1
WH: white
GN
BK
A1 L1
E43845
1 2 F O F O
locked by par
vérouillage locked by par
vérouillage
tripping
l'ordre de tripping
l'ordre de
order
déclenchement order
déclenchement
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
without auxiliary
E43912
E43913
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
WH
RD
GN
GN
CE CE
RD
RD
GN
VT
YE
YE
YE
VT
VT
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 102 104
trip unit
déclencheur
SDE
MN (1)
MX SD
D4 C2 91 11 21 31 81 101
GY
GY
BK
BK
OR
BK
BL
GY
CD CD
E43974
314 312 324 322 352 354 362 364 D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 A2 A4 B4 A2 A4 B4
RD
GN
WH
YE
RD
GN
VT
RD
RD
YE
GN
GN
VT
CE CE
RD
RD
YE
YE
VT
VT
D1 C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4 82 84 A2 A4 B4
MT (2) MT (3)
trip unit
SDE SDE
MN (1)
MX SD
BK
D4 C2 91 11 21 31 81 A1 151 152 81 A1 B1
GY
GY
BK
BK
OR
GN
BL
BK
GY
BK
BK
GY
CD CD
22 31 34 A2 B1 B4
(convertible to CAF)
21 24 32 A1 A4 B2
12 91 94 C2
11 14 92 C1 D1 D4
E43980
P1 P1
S2 S2
(4) (4)
S1 S1
P2 P2
(2) (2)
(6) (5) (C)
Z11 Z12 T1 T2 R1 R2 Z11 Z12 T1 T2 e+ e-
Q Q
ili i
auxiliary source auxiliary source
(1) : STR55UE RF / STR55UE TRF (1) : STR55UE FC / STR55UE RFC / STR55UE TRF / STR55UE TRFC
STR45AE RF / STR45AE TRF. STR45AE RFC / STR45AE TRFC (R function included in C function).
trip unit STR45BE T/R/C (2) : zone selective interlocking with the upstream circuit breaker (remove
jumper), Lmax = 20m (twisted wires recommended).
(3) : zone selective interlocking with the downstream circuit breaker (remove
E43981
trip unit(1)
déclencheur
Z21 Z22
(3)
F : fault indications
R : load monitoring
e+ T1
T : residual current type earth fault protection R1
Z11 Z21 F11
R3
e– T2
Z : zone selective interlocking R2 Z12 F12 Z22 R4
Note:
Connection by 6.35 mm tab connectors and 0.6 to 2.5 mm2 wires.
All diagrams are shown with circuits “de-energised”, all devices “open” and
relays in “normal” position.
CN1
CN2 - CN 2 – SD : trip indication switch
OF1/ : changeover switches
OF2/
F1
OF3
MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
F O
motor mechanism module circuits
ordre tripping
de
and MN/MX
déclenchement
order (1) F : closing order orders
(1)
D1 94 A2 A4 B4
should not be
O : opening order simultaneous
WH
RD
YE
GN
VT
D1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
Q OF1 OF2 OF3 Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
MT
trip unit
déclencheur
SD SDE
Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
MN
BK : black
BL : blue
GN : green
BK
D4 91 11 21 31 81 A1 151 152
GY : grey
BK
BL
GN
GY
OR : orange
RD : red
D4 91 A1 B2
VT : violet
WH : white
YE : yellow
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
F O
ordretripping
de
déclenchement
order (1)
(1)
C1 94 A2 A4 B4
WH
RD
RD
YE
GN
VT
C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Q
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SD SDE
MX
BK
C2 91 11 21 31 81 A1 151 152
OR
BK
GN
GY
C2 91 A1 B2
CN1
CN2 - CN 2 – SD : trip indication switch
OF1/ : changeover switches
OF2/
F1
OF3
MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
F : closing order orders
should not be
F O O : opening order simultaneous
94 A2 A4 B4 Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
RD
RD
YE
GN
VT
92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
91 11 21 31 81 A1 151 152
BK
GN
GY
91 A1 B2
E43922
1 2 F O F O
verrouillage
locked by par verrouillage
locked by par
l'ordre de
tripping l'ordre de
tripping
order
déclenchement déclenchement
order
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 82
without auxiliary
E43923
E43924
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 82
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 – MN : undervoltage release
MX : shunt release
F1
MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
and MN/MX
H1 : electrical fault signal lamp
F : closing order orders
F O
should not be
ordre de H1 O : opening order simultaneous
tripping
déclenchement
(1)order (1) (1) : tripping order must lock out closing order.
D1 A2 A4 B4
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
WH
RD
YE
GN
VT
RD
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
carried out locally and manually.
Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
Q
Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
MT BK : black
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE BL : blue
MN GN : green
GY : grey
OR : orange
RD : red
BK
D4 81 A1 151 152
GN
VT : violet
GY
BL
WH : white
D4 A1 B2
YE : yellow
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
F O
ordre de H1
tripping
déclenchement
(1) order (1)
C1 A2 A4 B4
WH
RD
YE
GN
VT
RD
C1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MX
BK
C2 81 A1 151 152
GN
OR
GY
C2 A1 B2
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 – MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
motor mechanism module circuits
F1
H1 : electrical fault signal lamp
F : closing order orders
should not be
O : opening order simultaneous
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
F O
H1 carried out locally and manually.
A2 A4 B4 Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
RD
YE
GN
VT
RD
81 A1 151 152
GN
GY
A1 B2
E43970
1 2 F O F O
verrouillage
locked by par verrouillage
locked by par
l'ordre
trippingde l'ordre de
tripping
order
déclenchement order
déclenchement
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
without auxiliary
E43929
E43930
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
CN1
CN2 - CN 2 – MT : motor mechanism module (type TS)
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
F1
motor mechanism module circuits
and MN/MX
H1 : tripped position signal lamp
F : closing order orders
should not be
O : opening order simultaneous
O H1
F Caution: the opening and closing orders are
of the impulse type. For maintained orders,
A2 A4 B4
terminal B4 must not be connected.
Note:
RD
YE
GN
VT
RD
déclencheur
trip unit
MT Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
SDE
BK : black
GN : green
GY : grey
RD : red
VT : violet
BK
81 A1 B1
BK
GY
YE : yellow
A1 B1
E43956
1 2
F O F O
A2 A4 B4 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 82
E29491
E28449
N 11 12 13 14 15 16
N
IVE
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
remote reset
QN
E29492
OF2
MT
11 12 13 14 15 16
trip unit
déclencheur
SDE
N
IVE
R
21 81 A1 L1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RN RR
automatic reset
22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
QR 11 12 13 14 15 16
OF2
(1)
MT N
trip unit
déclencheur
SDE IVE
(1)
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
21 81 A1 L1
L1 L2
11 12 13 14 15 16
84 84
N
SDE"N" SDE"R"
(2) (2) IVE
81 81
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON OR FN FR
order de
ordre forretour
returnsur
transfer to
la source source
"normal" "normal"(1)
(1)
(1) : the orders for transfers between the "normal"
and "replacement" sources must be electrically
interlocked.
(2) : simplified wiring diagram. The SDE signals CN 1 + CN 1 +
are transmitted to the IVE unit. The SDE contacts
are fitted in the circuit breakers. CN 2 – CN 2 –
IVE operation
E27119
I
ON
O
I
IN
O
>150 ms
I
OR
O
I
IR
O
>150 ms
I
QN
O
250 ms 500 ms
I
QR
O
250 ms 500 ms 250 ms
D1
D1 22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
QN
OF2
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MN
D4 21 81 A1 L1
D4
REPLACEMENT
REMPLACEMENT
KA3
BP
KA3
CN2 - CN2 –
D1
D1 22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
Automatic reset
Réarmement automatique
QR
OF2
(1)
MT N
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE IVE
(1)
MN R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
KA3 KA3
D4 21 81 A1 L1
D4
NORMAL
CN3 - CN3 +
tripping
ordre de KA1
order
déclenchement
KA1
C1 22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
QN
OF2
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MX
C2 21 81 A1 L1
REPLACEMENT
REMPLACEMENT
CN6 - CN6 – (2)
CN5 - CN5 +
ordre de
tripping
déclenchement
order KA2
KA2
Automatic reset
Réarmement automatique
C1 22 24 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
(1)
N
QR
OF2
IVE
(1)
MT
R
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MX
KA1 KA2
(3)
C2 21 81 A1 L1
NORMAL
92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QN
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
trip unit
déclencheur
SDE
SD
91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
(1)
N
IVE
REPLACEMENT
REMPLACEMENT (1)
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QR
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
SD
91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
Symbols Note:
QN : normal-source Compact C After tripping on an electrical fault, manual local
resetting is required.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
QR : replacement-source Compact C Diagram shown with circuits "de-energised",
all devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
SD : trip indication switch
SDE : fault indication switch
OF1 : contact position indication switches
OF2
OF3
MT : motor mechanism
IVE : electrical interlocking and terminal
block
RN : QN-reset order
RR : QR-reset order
(1) factory wiring: cannot be modified
L1 L2
11 12 13 14 15 16
84 84
N
SDE"N" SDE"R"
(2) (2) IVE
81 81
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON OR FN FR
order de
ordre for transfert
transfer sur
to
"replacement"
la source (1) (1)
source "remplacement"
order de
ordre forretour
returnsur
transfer to
(1) : the orders for transfers between the "normal" "normal"
la source source
"normal"(1)
(1)
and "replacement" sources must be electrically
interlocked.
(2) : simplified wiring diagram. The SDE signals
are transmitted to the IVE unit. The SDE contacts CN 1 + CN 1 +
are fitted in the circuit breakers. CN 2 – CN 2 –
IVE operation
E27119
I
ON
O
I
IN
O
>150 ms
I
OR
O
I
IR
O
>150 ms
I
QN
O
1s 500 ms
I
QR
O
1s 500 ms 1s
CN2 (2)
CN1 - CN1 +
NORMAL
ordre de
tripping order
déclenchement
D1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QN
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MN
SD
D4 91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
(1)
N
REPLACEMENT IVE
REMPLACEMENT (1)
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QR
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MN
SD
D4 91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
Symbols Note:
QN : Compact C "Normal" After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
QR : replacement-source Compact C Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
SDE : fault indication switch
SD : trip indication switch
OF1/ : changeover switches
OF2/
OF3
MN : undervoltage release
MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
(1) : prefabricated wiring supplied
(2) : independent auxiliary source
CN1 - CN1 +
NORMAL
ordre de
tripping order
déclenchement
C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QN
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MX
SD
C2 91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
(1)
N
IVE
REPLACEMENT
REMPLACEMENT (1)
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C1 92 94 12 14 22 24 32 34 82 84 152 A4 A2 B2 B4
QR
OF1 OF2 OF3
MT
déclencheur
trip unit
SDE
MX
SD
C2 91 11 21 31 81 151 A1
Symbols Note:
QN : Compact C "Normal" After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
carried out locally and manually.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
QR : replacement-source Compact C Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
circuit breaker with motor mechanism
SDE : fault indication switch
SD : trip indication switch
OF1/ : changeover switches
OF2/
OF3
MX : shunt release
MT : motor mechanism module (type T)
(1) : prefabricated wiring supplied.
(2) : this source can be:
- the source present for installation with voltage
monitoring,
- an independent source.
In both cases, protection must be provided for the
MX.
E43968 f
selecteur
selector
N
E33075
R
N R auto stop
23 22
14 13 16 15 11 12 10 9 5 7 6 8
1 3 5 1 3 5
Q1 Q2
transfer conditions
2 4 6 2 4 6
E43969 f
2 N O L 17 18 20 21 R E 25
ACP
N R siif contact
contact fermé
closed
24 N O L 9 10 R E 25
ordre de
permutation
voluntary transfer
volontaire (ex: EJP)
BA
17 18 20
21
11 12 13 14 15 16 10 9 8 7 6 5
11 12 13 14 15 16
N
IVE
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
removeàfor
enlever
C801/1251
pour C801/1251
Symbols Note:
Tests on "Normal" and "Replacement"
Q1 : circuit breaker supplying and Diagram shown with circuits "de-energised", all
devices "open" and relays in "normal" position. voltages
protecting the automatic Single-phase check for UN and UR: tested
control circuits for the "Normal" across terminals 1 and 5 of circuit breakers
source Q1 and Q2.
Q2 : circuit breaker supplying and
protecting the automatic
control circuits for the
"Replacement" source
ACP : auxiliaries control plate
BA : controller
IVE : electrical interlocking and
terminal block unit
I
UN or KT
O
I
UR
O
I
KR
O
I
QN
O
I
QR
O
T1 500 ms T2 500 ms
250 ms 250 ms
0,1…30 ss
0.1…30 0,1…240
0.1…30 ss
Outputs
QN : normal-source circuit breaker
QR : replacement-source circuit breaker.
E43965
selecteur délestage démarrage groupe
E43918
14 13 16 15 11 12 10 9 5 7 6 8
1 3 5 1 3 5
Q1 Q2
2 4 6 2 4 6
ACP
transfer conditions
E43964
24 N O L 17 18 20 21 R E 25
24 N O L 9 10 R E 25
A
B
C
01
/ voltage
N
see tableau
"normal" UN A=0 1 phase control si contact fermé
voir contrôle de la A=1 3 phases control N R
if contact closed
test table
tension "normal" UN EJP / voluntary
ordre de
B=0 N=off fault permutation
B=1 N=on generator volontaire (ex: EJP)
voluntary transfer
C=0 t6=120s t max
24 N O L R E 25 C=1 t6=180s start generator
23 22
Connectors 20 and 21 :
additional a check contact
(not carried out by the controller)
UA
17 18 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 10 9 8 7 6 5 UN tests
"Normal" UN test
N
11 12 13 14 15 16
A=0 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
N
IVE Q1 Q1 Q1
R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A=1 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
à enlever
remove for C801/1251
pour C801/1251 Q1 Q1
"Replacement" UR test
Single-phase check for voltage UR across
terminals 1 and 5 of circuit breaker Q2.
Symbols Note:
Q1 : circuit breaker supplying and Diagram shown with circuits "de-energised",
all devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
protecting the automatic
control circuits for the "Normal"
source
Q2 : circuit breaker supplying and
protecting the automatic
control circuits for the
"Replacement" source
ACP : auxiliaries control plate
UA : controller
IVE : electrical interlocking and
terminal block unit
boucle COM
E43966
E43967
COM loop
24 N O L 17 18 20 21 R E 25 2
4 6
8
A
1
10
24 N O L 17 18 20 21 R E 25 2
4 6
8
1
B 14 12
5 A 10
C + 0v 24v 3 7 B
C
14
5
12
01 1 9 + 0v 24v 3 7
24v 0v + 15
13
11 01 1 9
N / voltage 24v 0v + 15
13
11
operation
E30189
I
or KT
UN ou
O
I
UR
O
I
KR
O
I
KG
O
SH I
O
QN I
O
QR I
O
T1 T3 T2 T4 T5
0.1…30s
0,1...30s 120-180s 0.5…30s
0,5...30s 10…240s
10...240s 0.5…30s
0,5...30s 60...600s
Outputs
KG : engine-generator set control signal
SH : load-shedding control signal
QN : normal-source circuit breaker
QR : replacement-source circuit breaker.
BA operation
Operation Time delay settings
A four-position switch can be used to select: t1: time delay before QN opens when the
c automatic operation, voltage UN of the "Normal" source disappears.
c forced operation on source N, t2: time delay before QR opens when the
c forced operation on source R, voltage UN of the "Normal" source is restored.
c stop (both "Normal" and "Replacement" Adjustment of time delays in front:
sources off). c t1 from 0.1 to 30 seconds,
c t2 from 0.1 to 240 seconds.
4-position switch in "stop" position 4-position switch in "auto" position 4-position switch in "N " position (forced
(automatic operation) operation on "Normal" source)
E27107
E27108
E30187
QN and QR
stop open operat. on N R
source N I O
4-position switch N and UN present
QR closed QN closed
"stop" N R
operat. on
QR closes I O
source N
QN closed QN opens
t > 0.5 s
QR closes
QR closed
operat. on N R
source N O I
Inputs Legend
UN normal-source voltage c O position: circuit open
UR replacement-source voltage c I position: circuit closed
QN normal-source circuit breaker
QR replacement-source circuit breaker.
4-position switch in "stop" position 4-position switch in "auto" position 4-position switch in "N" position (forced
(automatic operation) operation on "Normal" source)
E30187
E30185
E27107
QN and QR
stop operat. on N R genset
open 4-position switch in "N" and UN present
source N I O off
operat. on N R
UR absent genset on
source N O I
Inputs Legend
UN normal-source voltage c O position: circuit open
UR replacement-source voltage c I position: circuit closed
QN normal-source circuit breaker
QR replacement-source circuit breaker.
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
D1
BP1
WH
97 13 43
KA1 KA1
14 44
Q1
trip unit
SDTAM
98
BL
D4
A1 X1
KA1 H1
A2 X2
Symbols Note:
Q : Compact NS100 to NS630 Diagram shown with circuits "de-energised",
all devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
auxiliary circuits Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
SDTAM : thermal fault early break signal BL : blue
BP1 : SDTAM reset button WH : white
KA1 : auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
H1 : SDTAM fault indication light
I
surcharge
overload
O
I
SDTAM
O
tr
I
BP1
O
I
H1
O
I
Q
O
IQ
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
D1
WH
97
21 42
Q1
BP1 KA1 KA1
22 44
trip-unit
déclencheur
SDTAM
(1)
98
BL
D4
E1
A1 A1 X1
KA1 KM1 H1
KM1
A2 KA2 A2 X2
E2
Symbols BP1: SDTAM reset button Accessories such as the lamps and the
Q1: Compact NS100 to NS630 KA1: auxiliary relay - Telemecanique auxiliary circuit breaker are not supplied with
F1: auxiliary circuit breaker CA...DN31 or CA...DN22 the circuit breaker.
SDTAM: thermal fault early break signal H1: SDTAM fault indication light All schemes are shown without the supply
voltage present, all devices open and relays
in the de-energised position.
I
E28437
surcharge
overload
O
tr
I
SDTAM
O
I
BP1
O
I
H1
O
I
KM1
O
I
Q1
O
tr: overload (long time) protection tripping On short-circuit or earth fault Legend
time Only circuit breaker Q1 opens. The above c O state: off-state
overload: current greater than Ir (long time automatic control sequence is not run. c I state: on-state
tripping threshold) c : either on - or off-state
Symbols
E28438
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
Q1: Compact NS100 to NS630
F1: auxiliary circuit breaker
SDTAM: thermal fault early break signal
F1
BP1: SDTAM reset button
KA1: auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
D1
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
H1: SDTAM fault indication light
Accessories such as the lamps and the
auxiliary circuit breaker are not supplied with
BP1
the circuit breaker.
D4 All schemes are shown without the supply
voltage present, all devices open and relays
in the de-energised position.
E4
C
RHK
12 11 14 22 21 24 X
(1)
A1 X1
KM1 H1
A2 X2
CN1 - CN 1 +
CN2 - CN 2 –
F1
D1
WH
97
21 42
Q
BP1 KA1 KA1
22 44
trip unit
déclencheur
SDTAM
(1)
98
BL
D4
E1
A1 A1 X1
KA1 KM1 H1
KM1
A2 KA2 A2 X2
E2
Symbols Note:
Q : Compact NS100 to NS630 Diagram shown with circuits "de-energised",
all devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
F1 : breaker for the protection of the
auxiliary circuits Colour codes for auxiliary wiring
SDTAM : thermal fault early break signal BL : blue
BP1 : SDTAM reset button WH : white
KA1 : auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA…DN31 or CA…DN22
KA2 : mechanical latching unit -
Telemecanique LA6 DK1
H1 : SDTAM fault indication light
KM1 : power contactor
(1) : KM1 operation conditions to be inserted
between 22 and A1
I
surcharge
overload
O
tr
I
SDTAM
O
I
BP1
O
I
H1
O
I
KM1
O
I
Q
O
C
RHK
12 11 14 22 21 24 X
(1)
A1 X1
KM1 H1
A2 X2
with MN Symbols
Q : Compact NS
SD : trip indication switch
E43831
- CN1 +
CN1
(1) tripping
ordre de MN : undervoltage release
déclenchement
CN2 - CN2 – order CAF1/ : early make switch of rotary handle
CAF2
X1
XI : terminal block and wiring
1 2 3 4 5 6
accessory for CAF (not included,
must be ordered separately)
(1) : independent auxiliary source
WH
WH
WH
Remark:
RD
RD
BL
D1
NS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not
plug-in or withdrawable devices. As a result there
is no automatic auxiliary wiring connector.
WH
Note:
After tripping on an electrical fault, resetting is
Q CAF1 CAF2
carried out locally and manually.
trip unit
déclencheur Diagram shown with circuit "de-energized", all
MN devices "open" and relays in "normal" position.
GN : green
RD : red
D4
WH : white
with MN + SD
E43830
CN1 - CN1 +
(1) tripping
ordre de
déclenchement
order
CN2 - CN2 –
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6
WH
WH
WH
GN
RD
RD
BK
BL
D1 92 94
WH
GN
RD
D1 C1 92 94
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
déclencheur
MN
SD
D4 91
BL
BL
D4 91
Compact
80 to 1250 A
complementary technical
information
page
tripping curves
protection of low-voltage distribution
networks:
c Compact NS 196
c reflex tripping 199
c Compact C 200
motor starter protection 202
protection of industrial control panels 204
earth fault protection and
load monitoring 205
effect of high temperatures 206
altitude derating 209
power dissipation, resistance 210
current limiting 212
400 Hz applications 216
circuit breaker selection
for DC applications 218
switch-disconnectors protection 220
protection of LV/LV transformers 222
cascading 224
protection discrimination 236
motor protection discrimination 265
cascading and enhanced
discrimination 270
protection of motor circuits
circuit breaker/contactor coordination 280
type 2 coordination 287
type 1 coordination 303
coordination between Merlin Gerin circuit
breakers and Telemecanique Canalis
electrical busbar trunking
195
Compact: complementary technical information
tripping curves
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
E28453
10 000
E28452
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
TM16D : 12 x In TM25D : 12 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
TM16G : 4 x In TM25G :
.1 .1 3.2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe : reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe :
.01
t < 10
10 ms
ms t < 10
10 ms
ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
10 000
E28455
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
TM40D : 12 x In TM63D : 8 x In
1 1
.5 .5
TM50D : 10 x In
.2 TM32D : 12,5 x In .2
TM40G : TM63G :
.1 2 x In .1 2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe : .01 reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe :
t t<<10
10ms
ms tt<< 10
10 ms
ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
E28457
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 TM125D
10 x In
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
NS160/250
1 Im = 12 x In 1
.5 .5 TM160D
NS100 8 x In
.2 Im = 8 x In .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe : reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe :
.01
t t<<10
10 ms
ms t t<<10
10ms
ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) 2
Im = 5 … 10 x In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 reflex tripping:
déclenchement réflexe :
tt << 10
10 ms
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir
E28460
E28459
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
Im = 2…10 x Ir Im = 2…10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
1 1
.5 .5
Im = 2…10 x Ir
.2 Im = 2…10 x Ir .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping : reflex tripping :
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
E28462
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100 réflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
50 50 tr = 1…16 s
20 20
Ii = 1.5…11 x In
10 10
5 5
t(s) Isd = 1.5…10 x Ir
t(s) 2 2
Im = 2…10 x Ir 1
1
i2 t ON
.5 .5
0.3
.2 .2 0.2
.1 .1 i 2 t OFF 0.1
.05 .05
0
.02 .02
reflex tripping
déclenchement réflexe :
.01 t < 10
10 ms
ms
.01
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / Ir I / In
5 NS100-NS160
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
kA
kArms
eff
E24057
E24056
Inst. (*)
5 000 5 000 C801 N-H C801 L C1251 N-H
C1001 N-H C1001 L
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In 15 In 8 In 12 In
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
STR35ME
200 200 in OFF position
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t (s) t (s)
2 2 I2t ON
Im = 1.5…10 x Ir Inst (*)
I = 1.5…10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
0.3 0.3
.2 .2 0.2 0.2
.05 .05
0 0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30
x Ir x Ir x In
STR35GE STR55UE
10 000 10 000
E24059
E24058
Inst. (*)
5 000 Inst. (*)
C801 N-H C801 L C1251 N-H
5 000 C801 N-H C801 L C1251 N-H
C1001 N-H C1001 L C1001 N-H C1001 L
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In 15 In 8 In 12 In
2 000 15 In 8 In 12 In
2 000
tr = 15…480s
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 Im = 1.5…10 x Ir 5 Im = 1.5…10 x Ir
t (s) t (s)
2 2
I2t ON Inst (*) I2t ON Inst (*)
1 1
.5 .5
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
.2 0.2 0.2
.05 .05
0 0
.02 .02
0 0
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30
x Ir x In x Ir x In
E24060
S (*)
5 000 C801 N-H C1001 N-H C1251 N-H
5 000
20 In 23 In 18 In
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In tr = 15…480s
1 000 1 000
tr = 15…480s
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 Im = 1.5…10 x Ir (max 8 x In)
t (s) Im = 1.5…10 x Ir t (s)
2 2
I2t ON S (*) I2t ON
1 1
limit if Ir = 0.4 x In
.5 .5
0.3 0.3 sellim
.2 0.2 .2 0.2
.05 .05
limit if Ir = 1 x In
0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
x Ir x In x Ir
E30212
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100 thermalthermique
tenue withstand
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
Im = 6…14 x In Im = 6 …14 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping:réflexe :
déclenchement
.01 .01 t<
t <1010msms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / In
E28370
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000 Ir
1 000 1 000
500 maximum thermal withstand 500
MA220
200 200
MA150
100 100
50 50
20 class 10 (IEC 947-4)
20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
Im = 9 …14 x In
1 1
.5 .5
Im = 13 x Ir
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping : reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
.01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002 I = 15 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / In I / Ir
E28369
E28468
10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 maximum thermal withstand
100
50 50
class 10 A
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2 hot tripping curve
1 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
Im = 9 ... 14 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping : reflex tripping
.01 .01 t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 Ii = 10,4 x In
.002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / In I / Ir
10 000 10 000
E38946
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100 class 20
50 class 10 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 hot tripping curve t(s) 2 hot tripping curve
1 cold tripping curve 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
Thermal withstand capacities are given for circuit breakers working Reflex tripping: see page 199.
under 65 °C of ambient temperature.
trip units for Compact C801…C1251 See STR35ME and STR55UE curves page 200.
Merlin Gerin 203
Compact: complementary technical information
tripping curves
protection of industrial control panels
NSC100N
TM16D / TM25D / TM32D / TM40D TM50D / TM63D / TM80D
10 000 10 000
E44454
E44455
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) 2 t(s) 2
1 1
16A : Im = 37,5 x In
.5 .5
20A : Im = 30 x In 50A : Im = 20 x In
.2 .2 63A : Im = 16 x In
25A : Im = 24 x In
70A : Im = 14,3 x In
.1 32A : Im = 19 x In .1
.05 80A : Im = 12,5 x In
.05 40A : Im = 15 x In
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir I / Ir
TM100D
10 000
E44456
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) 2
1 100A : Im = 12,5 x In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir
5 000
2 000
Ig = 0.2…1 x In
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
I2t ON
5
t(s) 2
1
.5 0.4
0.3
.2 0.2
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
E24062
5 000 5 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
2 000 2 000
Ih = 0.2…0.6 x In Ic1 = 0.8…1 x Ir
1 000 1 000
Ic2 = 0.5…1 x Ir
500 500
200 tr = 15…480s
200
100 100 tr1 = tr / 2
50 50
tr2 = tr / 4
20 20
10 10
5 5
t (s) t (s)
2 I2t ON 2
1 1
.5 0.4
.5
0.3
.2 0.2
.2
.1 I2t OFF 0.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.05.07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 .05.07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
x In x Ir
These values are not modified for fixed single-pole and two-pole Compact NS
circuit breakers equipped with one of the rat. (A) 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65°C 70°C
following elements: 16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
c Vigi module,
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
c ammeter module,
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
c insulation monitoring module,
c current transformer module. 63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
They are also valid for plug-in / withdrawable 80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
configurations equipped with: 100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
c ammeter module, 125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
c current transformer module. 160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
However, for plug-in / withdrawable
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
configurations equipped with Vigi or
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
insulation monitoring modules, the following
coefficients must be applied:
trip unit coefficient Compact NS100 to NS250 with TM-D and TM-G trip units
TM16 to TM125 1 rat. (A) 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65°C 70°C
TM160 to TM250 0.9 16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NS400 and NS630 The following tables give the maximum long-
These values are not modified for fixed or time protection setting to be used as a
plug-in / withdrawable configurations function of the ambient temperature around
equipped with: the circuit breaker.
c ammeter module,
c current transformer module. NS400N/H/L 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
However, for plug-in / withdrawable fixed In : 400A 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
configurations equipped with Vigi or Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9
insulation monitoring modules, the following
plug-in / In : 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
coefficients must be applied:
withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
breaker trip unit coeff.
NS630N/H/L 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C
NS400N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.97
fixed In : 630A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
NS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.8 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
Note: when equipped with a Visu module, a plug-in / In : 570A 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
Compact NS630 can not receive a Vigi withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/0.8 0.8/0.98 0.8/0.95
module. For earth fault protection, see
Vigirex catalogue.
Altitude does not significantly affect circuit- The following table gives the corrections to
breaker characteristics up to 2000 m. Above be applied for altitudes above 2000 m.
this altitude, it is necessary to take into The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
account the decrease in the dielectric
strength and cooling capacity of air.
Compact NS with thermal- Compact NSC100N with TM-D trip unit / NSC100NA
fixed breaker additional power
magnetic trip unit 3/4 poles rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi
Power dissipation: in watts (W) per pole. (N, L3) (L1, L2)
Resistance: in milliohms (mΩ) per pole. NSC100N 16 15 4 0.06 0.06
20 11.2 4.5 0.1 0.1
25 8 5 0.16 0.16
32 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.26
40 3.7 6 0.4 0.4
50 2.8 7 0.63 0.63
63 2 8 1 1
70 2 10 1.3 1.3
80 1.4 9 1.6 1.6
100 1 10 2.5 2.5
NSC100NA 100 0.6 6 2.5 2.5
E28469
peak current 200
C801 H C801 L
C1001 C1001
100 C1251 C1251 C801
N C1001
80
70
60 L
50 H NS630
NS400
40 N
L
k 30 NS250
H NS160
NS100
N
20 TM32...250
TM25
TM16
10
8 N
7
6
5
4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
kArms
kA eff
8
thermal stress 10
E28470
C801 C801
5 C1001 H C1001
C1251 N C1251
3 L
C801
2 C1001
7
10
5 H L
N
NS630
3 L
N H
2 NS400
2
A S
6
10 H L
NS250
NS160
5 NS100
N TM32…250
3
TM25
2
5
10 TM16
3
2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
kArms
kA eff
E27104
100 C801H
C1001H
80 C1251H C801L
C1001L
70
60 C801N
50 C1001N
C1251N L
40 L NS630 NS400
30 H
kÂ
L
NS100-NS160
20 N L NS250 TM 40…160
TM 25
NH
TM 16
10
8
7
6
5
4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
kArms
kA eff
8
thermal stress 10
E27105
C801H
5 C1001H
C1251H
3
C801L
2 C801N C1001L
C1001N
C1251N
7
10
L
5 H NS630
L
NS400
3 H
N
2 2
A S L
N
6
10 NS250
H NS100-NS160
N TM 32…160
3 TM 25
2 TM 16
5
10
3
2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
kA
kArms
eff
For thermal trip units, the current settings Electronic trip units
tripping thresholds are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 i 1). The use of electronics offers the advantage
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by For magnetic trip units, the current settings of greater operating stability when the
multiplying the 50 Hz values by the following are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at frequency is varied. However, the devices
coefficient: 50 Hz (K2 u 1). are still subjected to frequency related
c K1 for thermal trip units; Adjustable trip units should be set to temperature effects which may sometimes
c K2 for magnetic trip units. minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers pose restrictions on their use.
On adjustable trip units, these adaptation equipped with low magnetic trip units Column K1 of the table below gives the
coefficients are independent of the unit (type G). maximum permissible current to be used for
adjustment knob position. the current setting (knob position).
auxiliary releases
For Compact NS100-630 U (V) 400 Hz rectifier additional resistor
For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 110/127 V Thomson 110 BHz or 10 kΩ-2 W
125 V DC rated releases can be used. The General Instrument W06 or
release must be supplied by the 400 Hz Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3
220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 22 kΩ-8 W
system via a rectifier bridge (to be selected General Instrument W06 or
from the table opposite) and an additional Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3
resistor with characteristics depending on 380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 33 kΩ-15 W
the system voltage and the type of circuit
breaker. Note : other models of rectifier bridges can be used if
their characteristics are at least equivalent to those stated
Connection above.
E27172
R
MN/MX
U volt
125 V DC
400 Hz
fault effect fault A max. Isc Isc close to max. Isc no effect
the positive polarity the positive polarity is the only
is the only one involved one involved, voltage U/2
fault B max. Isc max. Isc max. Isc
both polarities are involved both polarities are involved both polarities are involved
fault C no effect same as fault A but this is the no effect
negative polarity which is involved
most unfavorable case fault A faults A and C fault B
distribution of the the poles required to perform on each polarity there must be the the poles required to perform
breaking poles the break are in series number of poles required to perform the break are shared between
on the positive polarity the break of max. Isc at U/2 the 2 polarities
Calculation the short-circuit current (Isc) Example As the above calculation shows, the short-
across the terminals of a battery What is the short-circuit current at the circuit current is relatively weak.
When a short-circuit occurs across its terminals of a standing battery with the Note: If the internal resistance is not known, the following
terminals, a battery discharges a current following characteristics: approximate formula can be used: Isc = kC, where C is the
given by Ohm's law: c capacity: 500 Ah; capacity of the battery expressed in Ampere-hours, and k
is a coefficient close to 10 but in any case always lower
Vb c max. discharge voltage: 240 V than 20.
Isc = (110 cells of 2.2 V);
Ri
E27173
where Vb = the maximum discharge voltage c discharge current: 300 A; 240 V DC
c autonomy: 1/2 hour; 300 A
(battery 100% charged). 500 Ah Isc
and Ri = the internal resistance equivalent to c internal resistance: 0.5 mΩ per cell. Ri = 0.5 mΩ/cell
the sum of the cell resistances (figure Ri = 110 x 0.5 10-3 = 55 10-3
generally given by the manufacturer Isc =
240
= 4.4kA
according to the capacity of the battery). 55 10−3
E28210
E28208
+ + +
125 V = 250 V = 250 V =
- - -
The table opposite indicates that a NC100H Each pole will be exposed to a maximum of The table opposite indicates that NS400H
circuit breaker (30 kA, 2P, 125 V) should be U/2 = 125 V. circuit breakers (85 kA, 1P, 250 V) should be
used. The table opposite indicates that NC100H used. At least 2 poles must take part in
The table above indicates that both circuit (30 kA, 2P, 125 V), NS100N (50 kA, 1P, breaking. The table above indicates that the
breaker poles should be fitted on the positive 125 V) or NS160N (50 kA, 1P, 125 V) circuit half the number of circuit breaker poles
pole of the network. breakers should be used. required for breaking should be fitted on the
An additional circuit breaker pole can be The table above indicates that both circuit positive pole of the network and the other
fitted on the negative pole of the network for breaker poles must take part in the breaking half on the negative pole.
isolation purposes. at a voltage of 125 V.
Compact switch-disconnectors
upstream protection
by circuit breaker type / maximum rating (A)
.8
.85
Ir
.9
.95
.98
3
2
4
push
to
trip
Im
5
10
6
8
90 %Ir
105
alarm
STR
Ir Im
22 DE
50/60H
z test
Compact switch-disconnectors
upstream protection
by circuit breaker type / maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (380/415 V) kA rms
making capacity (380/415 V) kA peak
type / maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (380/415 V) kA rms
making capacity (380/415 V) kA peak
type / maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (380/415 V) kA rms
making capacity (380/415 V) kA peak
type / maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (380/415 V) kA rms
making capacity (380/415 V) kA peak
type / maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (380/415 V) kA rms
making capacity (380/415 V) kA peak
by fuse type aM (1) maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (500 V) kA rms
making capacity (500 V) kA peak
type gl (2) maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (500 V) kA rms
making capacity (500 V) kA peak
type gl (1) maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (500 V) kA rms
making capacity (500 V) kA peak
type BS (2) maximum rating (A)
Isc max. (500 V) kA rms
making capacity (500 V) kA peak
type BS (1) maximum rating (A)
(1) Protection by external thermal relay obligatory. Isc max. (500 V) kA rms
(2) Without external thermal relay. making capacity (500 V) kA peak
220 Merlin Gerin
NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA
400 500
100 100
220 220
315 500
100 100
220 220
400 630
100 100
220 220
315 & 200M315 500
80 80
176 176
355 & 315M355 450 & 400M450
80 80
176 176
Merlin Gerin 221
Compact: complementary technical information
protection of LV/LV transformers
I
overcurrent protection devices. values of 20 to 25 times the rated current
Î1st
1erepeak
crête
even for transformers rated less than
10
10 àto25In
25 In 50 kVA.
This transient inrush current decays very
quickly (in a few milliseconds).
In
θ t
eprimary winding
p The Compact and Masterpact circuit These tables indicated the circuit breaker
breakers detailed in the following tables offer and trip unit to be used depending on:
the following advantages: c the primary supply voltage (230 V or
c protection of the transformer in the event 400 V);
of abnormal overloads; c the type of transformer (single-phase or
c no nuisance tripping when the primary three-phase).
winding is energised; They correspond to the most frequent case
c unimpaired electrical endurance of the in which the primary is wound externally (1).
circuit breaker. The type of circuit breaker to be used (i.e. N,
H or L) depends on the breaking capacity
required at the point of installation.
protection using Compact NS100 to NS250 equipped with TM-D thermal-magnetic trip unit
transformer rating (kVA) protective device
Compact circuit 230 V 1-ph 230 V 3-ph/ 400 V 3-ph circuit breaker trip unit
breakers 400 V 1-ph
3 5 to 6 9 to 10 NS100N/H/L TM16D
5 8 to 9 14 to 16 NS100N/H/L TM25D
7 to 9 13 to 16 22 to 28 NS100N/H/L TM40D
12 to 15 20 to 25 35 to 44 NS100N/H/L TM63D
16 to 19 26 to 32 45 to 56 NS100N/H/L TM80D
18 to 23 32 to 40 55 to 69 NS160N/H/L TM100D
23 to 29 40 to 50 69 to 87 NS160N/H/L TM125D
29 to 37 51 to 64 89 to 111 NS250N/H/L TM160D
37 to 46 64 to 80 111 to 139 NS250N/H/L TM200D
summary
application network upstream device downstream device tableau page
distribution cascading 220/240 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 226
Compact C, CM and Masterpact Compact and Multi 9 227
380/415 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 228
Compact C and CM Compact 229
440 V Compact NS Compact and Multi 9 230
Compact C, CM and Masterpact Compact, CM and Masterpact 231
motor protection cascading 220/240 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral, GVM 232
380/415 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral, GVM 232
440 V Compact NS Compact NS, Integral 233
cascading for installations with 2
or 3 transformers in parallel 234
220/240 V network
N
downstream from
a 380/415 V network
For 1P + N or 2P circuit breakers connected
between the phase and neutral on a
380/415 V network, with a TT or TNS neutral
system, consult the 220/240 V cascading
table to determinate cascading possibilities
between upstream and downstream circuit
breakers.
upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
breaking capacity kA eff 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
C60a 30 80 80
C60N 40 60 60
C60H 50 65 65
C60L i 25 A 65 80 80
C60L i 40 A 65 80 80
C60L i 63 A 50 65 65
XC/SC40 40 40 40
PM25 u 14 A
NC100H/NC125H 65 100 100
NC100L 65 70 100
NC100LS 85 100 150
NC100LH/LMA 150
NG125a 40 50 70
NG125N 60 70 85
NG125H 85 100
NG125L/LMA 150
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NSC100N 85 100 100 85 100 100 85 100 100
NS100N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS100H 150 150 150
NS160N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS160H 150 150 150
NS250N 100 150 100 150 100 150
NS250H 150 150 150
NS400N 100 150 100 150
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 100 150
NS630H 150
upstream C801N C801H C801L C1001N C1001H C1001L C1251N C1251H CMH Mpact L
breaking capacity kA eff 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 125 130
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS100N 100 150 100 150 100
NS100H 150 150
NS160N 100 150 100 150 100
NS160H 150 150
NS250N 100 150 100 150 100
NS250H 150 150
NS400N 100 150 100 150 100
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 100 150 100 150 100
NS630H 150 150
C801N 100 150 100 150 100 100 100
C801H 150 150
C1001N 100 150 100 100 100
C1001H 150
C1251N 100 100 100
upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
breaking capacity kA eff 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
C60a 15 20 20
C60N 25 30 30
C60H 30 30 30
C60L i 25 A 40 40
C60L i 40 A 30 40 40
C60L i 63 A 30 30 30
XC/SC40 25 30 30
NC100H/NC125H 25 30 30
NC100L 50 70
NC100LS 70 100
NC100LH/LMA 70 150
NG125a 25 25 25
NG125N 36 36 70
NG125H 50 100
NG125L/LMA 70 150
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NSC100N 36 50 50 45 50 50 45 50 50
NS100N 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS100H 150 150 150
NS160N 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS160H 150 150 150
NS250N 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS250H 150 150 150
NS400N 70 150 70 150
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 70 150
NS630H 150
(1) With single pole, single pole + neutral and two pole circuit breakers, with TT or TNS systems, see cascading table for 220/240 V network.
upstream C801N C801H C801L C1001N C1001H C1001L C1251N C1251H CMN
breaking capacity kA eff 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70 70
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS100N 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70
NS100H 150 150
NS160N 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70
NS160H 150 150
NS250N 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70
NS250H 150 150
NS400N 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 50 70 150 50 70 150 50 70
NS630H 150 150
C801N 70 150 70 150 70 70
C801H 150 150
C1001N 70 150 70 70
C1001H 150
C1251N 70 70
upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
breaking capacity kA eff 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NC100L 50 70
NC100LS 65 100
NC100LH/LMA 65 130
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NSC100N 35 50 50 42 50 50 42 50 50
NS100N 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS100H 130 130 130
NS160N 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS160H 130 130 130
NS250N 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS250H 130 130 130
NS400N 65 130 65 130
NS400H 130 130
NS630N 65 130
NS630H 130
Network 220/240 V
upstream NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160N NS160H NS160L
breaking capacity kA eff 85 100 150 85 100 150
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS80HMA 150 150
NS100N 100 150 100 150
NS100H 150 150
NS160N 100 150
NS160H 150
GV2M u 23 A 85 100 100 85 100 100
Integral 18 u 10 A 85 100 150 85 100 150
Integral 32 u 25 A 85 100 150 85 100 150
Integral 63 u 32 A 85 100 150 85 100 150
Network 380/415 V
upstream NSC100N NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160N NS160H NS160L
breaking capacity kA eff 18 25 70 150 36 70 150
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS80HMA 150 150
NS100N 70 150 36 70 150
NS100H 150 150
NS160N 70 150
NS160H 150
GV2M u 14 A 18 25 50 50
GV2L u 18 A 70 150
GV2P u 18 A 70 150
GV3M 70 150 70 150 150
Integral 18 u 10 A 70 150 70 150 150
Integral 32 u 25 A 70 150 70 150 150
Integral 63 u 32 A 70 150 70 150 150
upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
breaking capacity kA eff 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NS100N 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS100H 150 150 150
NS160N 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS160H 150 150 150
NS250N 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
NS250H 150 150 150
NS400N 70 150 70 150
NS400H 150 150
NS630N 70 150
NS630H 150
GV3M 70 150
Integral 18 u 10 A 70 150
Integral 32 u 25 A 70 150
Integral 63 u 32 A 70 150 70 150
Network 440 V
upstream NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160N NS160H NS160L
breaking capacity kA eff 25 65 130 2525 65 130
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS80HMA 150 150
NS100N 65 130 35 65 130
NS100H 130 130
NS160N 65 130
NS160H 130
Integral 32 u 16 A 65 130 65 130
Integral 63 u 25 A 65 130 65 130
upstream NS250N NS250H NS250L NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L
breaking capacity kA eff 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
downstream breaking capacity (kA eff)
NS80HMA 150 150 150
NS100N 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS100H 130 130 130
NS160N 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS160H 130 130 130
NS250N 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
NS250H 130 130 130
NS400N 65 130 65 130
NS400H 130 130
NS630N 65 130
NS630H 130
Integral 32 u 16 A 65 130
Integral 63 u 25 A 65 130 65 130
The following table indicates the types of ■ the equipment is installed in a switchboard
circuit breakers to be installed on the source with an ambient temperature of 30 °C
feeders and main feeders of an installation ■ to connect several transformers in parallel,
with 2 or 3 transformers connected in the transformers must have:
parallel (1). ■ the same Usc
The following assumptions are made: ■ the same transformation ratio
■ upstream network short-circuit power of ■ the same type of connection
500 MVA ■ a maximum power ratio of 2 between any
■ the transformers are all identical, 20 kV/ two of the transformers
410 V and with a normal short-circuit voltage ■ Isc is given only as a general indication
level and may vary depending on the percent Usc
■ the short-circuit current on the busbars values given by the transformer
does not take into account the connection manufacturers; the values for breaking
impedances (the worst case) capacities reinforced by cascading are
therefore given for higher values.
D1 D2
D4
Icc
Isc
transformer rating (kVA) 250 315 400 500 500 630 630 800 800
Icc maxi downstream from D4 17600 22200 28200 35200 35200 44400 44400 37500 37500
nominal transformer current (kVA) 352 444 564 704 704 887 887 1126 1126
circuit breaker D1 or D2 NS400N NS630N NS630N C801N C801H C1001N C1001H C1251N C1251H
breaking capacity (kA) 45 45 45 50 70 50 70 50 70
circuit breaker D4 reinforced breaking capacity (kA)
NS100N 45 45 45
NS160N 45 45 45 50 50
NS250N 45 45 45 50 70 50 50
NS400N 50 70 50 70 50 70
NS630N 50 70 50 70 50 70
C801N 70 70
C1001N 70
Example: Consider 2 parallel 800 kVA The 630 A feeder will be protected by a
transformers. The source protection devices NS630N circuit breaker (a breaking capacity
are two C125N circuit breakers equipped of 50 kA with cascading).
with STR25DE trip units set at 1250 A. The The 125 A feeder will be equipped with a
installation has two feeders rated 125 A and NS160H circuit breaker as cascading is not
630 A respectively. Isc max downstream of possible with an NS160N.
CB4 is 49 600 A.
D1 D2 D3
D4
Isc
transformer rating (kVA) 250 315 400 500 500 630 630 800 800
Icc maxi downstream from D4 26400 33300 42300 52800 52800 66600 66600 56300 56300
nominal transformer current (kVA) 352 444 564 704 704 887 887 1126 1126
circuit breaker D1 or D2 NS400N NS630N NS630H C801N C801H C1001N C1001H C1251N C1251H
breaking capacity (kA) 45 45 70 50 70 50 70 50 70
disjoncteur D4 reinforced breaking capacity (kA)
NS160N 45 45 45
NS250N 45 45 45
NS400N 70 50 70 50 50 50 50
NS630N 50 70 50 50 50 50
C801N 70 70
C1001N 70
Protection discrimination is an essential Industrial installations without discrimination c shutdown of vital safety equipment such
element that must be taken into account run a series of risks of varying importance as lubrification pumps, smoke fans, etc.
starting at the design stage of a low voltage including:
installation to ensure the highest level of c production deadline overruns;
availability for users. c interruption in manufacturing, entailing:
Discrimination is important in all installations v production or finished-product losses,
for the comfort of users, however it is v risk of damage to production machines in
fundamental in installations requiring a high continuous processes;
level of service continuity, e.g. industrial c restarting of machines, one by one,
manufacturing processes.
E26366
following a general power outage;
what is discrimination?
Discrimination, also called selectivity, is the
D1
coordination of automatic protection devices
in such a manner that a fault appearing at a
given point in a network is cleared by the
protection device installed immediately
upstream of the fault, and by that device
alone.
c Total discrimination
D2
Discrimination is said to be total if, for all
fault current values, from overloads up to the
non-resistive short-circuit current, circuit
breaker D2 opens and D1 remains closed.
c Partial discrimination
Discrimination is partial if the above
condition is not respected up to the full
short-circuit current, but only to a lesser
value termed the selectivity limit current (Is).
c No discrimination
In the event of a fault, both circuit breakers
D1 and D2 open.
natural discrimination with Due to the Roto-active breaking technique This is the result of the implementation and
employed by the Compact NS, the combined optimisation of three different techniques:
Compact NS circuit use of Merlin Gerin circuit breakers provides c current discrimination;
breakers an exceptional level of protection c time discrimination;
discrimination. c energy discrimination.
Overload protection: current
E26406
NS100 NS250
100A 250A discrimination
10000 Discrimination is ensured if the ratio
between setting thresholds is greater than
1.6 (for distribution circuit breakers).
Low short-circuit protection: time
1000 discrimination
Tripping of the upstream device is
slightly delayed to ensure that the
downstream device trips first.
100 Discrimination is ensured if the ratio
between the short-circuit thresholds is
greater than 1.5.
High short-circuit protection: energy
10 discrimination
This protection system combines the
t (s) exceptional current limiting capacity of the
Compact NS and the advantages of reflex
1 tripping, sensitive to the energy dissipated in
the device by the short-circuit. In the event
of a high short-circuit detected by two circuit
breakers, the downstream device limits it
.1 sharply. The energy dissipated in the
upstream device is not sufficient to trip it, i.e.
discrimination is total for all short-circuit
currents.
.01
Discrimination is ensured if the ratio
between the circuit breaker ratings is greater
than 2.
.001
.5 1 10 100 300
x 100A
M M M
requisite conditions
The values indicated in the tables (for 380, 415 and 440 V) are guaranteed if the following conditions are respected:
D1 application D2 Ratio between upstream and downstream settings
Thermal protection Magnetic protection
Ir up / Ir down Im up / Im down
TM…D Distribution TM…D or Multi9 u 1,6 u2
STR…SE/GE u 1,6 u 1,5
Motor MA + separate therm. relay u3 u2
Thermal-magnetic motor type u3 u2
STR…ME u3 u 1,5
STR2.. or 3.. Distribution TM…D or Multi9 u 2,5 u 1,5
fixed long time delay STR…SE/GE u 1,6 u 1,5
Motor MA + separate therm. relay u3 u 1,5
Thermal-magnetic motor type u3 u 1,5
STR…ME u3 u 1,5
STR5.. or 6.. Distribution TM…D or Multi9 u 1,6 u 1,5
with adjustable long time delay STR…SE/GE u 1,2 u 1,5
delay (1) Motor MA + separate therm. relay u3 u 1,5
Thermal-magnetic motor type u3 u 1,5
STR…ME u3 u 1,5
upstream NSC100N
downstream rating (A) 16 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100
setting Ir
DPN i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
B, C curves 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
25 0.6 T T T T T
32 T T T T T
DPN N i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
C, D curves 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
25 0.6 T T T T T
32 T T T T
40 T T T
XC40 i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 3 3 3 3 3
L-U curves 16 0.6 0.6 3 3 3 3 3
20 0.6 0.6 3 3 3 3 3
25 0.6 3 3 3 3 3
32 3 3 3 3
38 3 3 3
40 3 3 3
C60a i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
C curve 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
25 0.6 T T T T T
32 T T T T
40 T T T
C60N i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
B, C, D curves 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
25 0.6 T T T T T
32 6 6 6 8
40 6 6 8
50 6
63 6
C60H i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
C curve 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
25 0.6 T T T T T
32 6 6 6 8
40 6 6 8
50 6
63 6
C60L i 10 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
B, C curves 16 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
K curve 20 0.6 0.6 T T T T T
Z curve 25 0.6 T T T T T
32 6 6 6 8
40 6 6 8
50 6
63 6
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T
NSC100N 15 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
20 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
25 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
32 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
40 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
50 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
63 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
70 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
80 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
100 3.2 4 10 15 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
35 35 35
35 35
35
40 40 40 35 35
40 40 35 35
40 35 35
35 35
35
NSC100N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
NSC100N T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T
T T T T T T
T T T T T
T T T T
T T T
* Discrimination upstream CM circuit-breaker with trip unit STCM1 only.
upstream NSC100N
breaking capacity 18 kA
trip unit TM-D
downstream thermal rating (A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100
relay
GV2 M01 integrated 0.1 to 0.16 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M02 integrated 0.16 to 0.25 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M03 integrated 0.25 to 0.40 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M04 integrated 0.40 to 0.63 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M05 integrated 0.63 to 1 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M06 integrated 1 to 1.6 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M07 integrated 1.6 to 2.5 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M08 integrated 2.5 to 4 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 M10 integrated 4 to 6.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 M14 integrated 6 to 10 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 M16 integrated 9 to 14 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 M20 integrated 13 to 18 1 1 1 T
GV2 M21 integrated 17 to 23 1 1 T
GV2 M22 integrated 20 to 25 1 T
GV2 M32 integrated 24 to 32 T
GV2 P01 integrated 0.1 to 0.16 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P02 integrated 0.16 to 0.25 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P03 integrated 0.25 to 0.40 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P04 integrated 0.40 to 0.63 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P05 integrated 0.63 to 1 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P06 integrated 1 to 1.6 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P07 integrated 1.6 to 2.5 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P08 integrated 2.5 to 4 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 P10 integrated 4 to 6.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 P14 integrated 6 to 10 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 P16 integrated 9 to 14 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 P20 integrated 13 to 18 1 1 1 T
GV2 P21 integrated 17 to 23 1 1 T
GV2 P22 integrated 20 to 25 1 T
GV2 L03 LR2 D13 03 0.25 to 0.40 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L04 LR2 D13 04 0.40 to 0.63 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L05 LR2 D13 05 0.63 to 1 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L06 LR2 D13 06 1 to 1.6 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L07 LR2 D13 07 1.6 to 2.5 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L08 LR2 D13 08 2.5 to 4 T T T T T T T T T T
GV2 L10 LR2 D13 10 4 to 6.3 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 L14 LR2 D13 14 7 to 10 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 L16 LR2 D13 16 9 to 13 1 1 1 1 T
GV2 L20 LR2 D13 21 12 to 18 1 1 1 T
GV2 L22 LR2 D13 22 17 to 25 1 T
Integral 18 LB1-LB03P01 0.1 to 0.16 T T T T T T T T T T
LD1-LB030 LB1-LB03P02 0.16 to 0.25 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P03 0.25 to 0.40 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P04 0.40 to 0.63 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P05 0.63 to 1 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P06 1 to 1.6 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P07 1.6 to 2.5 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P08 2.5 to 4 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LB03P10 4 to 6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LB03P13 6 to 10 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LB03P17 10 to 16 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LB03P21 12 to 18 1 1 1 T
Integral 32 LB1-LC03M03 0.25 to 0.40 T T T T T T T T T T
LD1-LC030 LB1-LC03M04 0.40 to 0.63 T T T T T T T T T T
LD4-LC130 LB1-LC03M05 0.63 to 1 T T T T T T T T T T
LD4-LC030 LB1-LC03M06 1 to 1.6 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LC03M07 1.6 to 2.5 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LC03M08 2.5 to 4 T T T T T T T T T T
LB1-LC03M10 4 to 6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LC03M13 6 to 10 0.6 0.6 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LC03M17 10 to 16 1 1 1 1 T
LB1-LC03M22 16 to 25 1 T
LB1-LC03M53 23 to 32 T
Note: respect the basic overload and short-circuit discrimination rules, see page 236.
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 4 T T T T T T
4 4 T T T T T T 0.8 3 T T T T T T
1 1 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 4 T T T T T T
4 4 T T T T T T 0.8 3 T T T T T T
1 1 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 4 T T T T T T
4 4 T T T T T T 0.8 3 T T T T T T
1 1 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 1 T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 5 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 2 3 3 T T T 0.5 1.2 0.9 T T T T T
0.5 1.5 2 2 T T T 1.2 0.9 T T T T T
1 2 2 T T T 1.2 0.9 T T T T T
1.25 T T T T T T T T
T T T T T
T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1.5 1.5 T T T T T T 2 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 3 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 4 T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 3 T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1.5 1.5 T T T T T T 0.5 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 3 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 1 T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.8 T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 1 1.25 1.25 T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 1 1.25 1.25 T T T 1.2 0.9 35 35 T T T
1 1.25 1.25 T T T 1.2 0.9 35 35 T T T
1.25 1.25 T T T 1.2 0.9 35 35 T T T
1.25 T T T 35 35 T T T
T T T T T T
T T T T T
* Nota: strictly follow the rules of overload discrimination. See page 236.
Merlin Gerin A267
Complementary technical information Upstream: NS100 to 630,
motor protection discrimination C801 to C1251
Downstream: C60LMA,
NC100LMA, NG125LMA,
NS80HMA, NS100 to 630
upstream NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L
trip unit TM-D trip unit TM-D
downstream trip unit rating (A) 16 25 40 63 80 100 40 63 80 100 125 160
or thermal relay setting Ir
C60LMA 1.6 LR2 D13 06 1/1.6 0.2 T T T T T T T T T T T
C60LMA 2.5 LR2 D13 07 1.6/2.5 0.2 0.3 T T T T T T T T T T
C60LMA 4 LR2 D13 08 2.5/4 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 3 T 0.5 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 6.3 LR2 D13 10 4/6 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 5 0.5 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 10 LR2 D13 12 5.5/8 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 2 0.5 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 10 LR2 D13 14 7/10 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 12.5 LR2 D13 16 9/13 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 16 LR2 D13 21 12/18 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 T T T T
C60LMA 25 LR2 D13 22 17/25 0.7 0.8 T T T T
C60LMA 40 LR2 D33 53 23/32 0.8 T T T
C60LMA 40 LR2 D33 55 30/40 T T
NC100LMA 1.6 LR2 D13 06 1/1.6 0.2 T T T T T T T T T T T
NC100LMA 2.5 LR2 D13 07 1.6/2.5 0.2 0.3 T T T T T T T T T T
NC100LMA 4 LR2 D13 08 2.5/4 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 10 T 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 6.3 LR2 D13 10 4/6 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 10 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 10 LR2 D13 12 5.5/8 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 2 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 10 LR2 D13 14 7/10 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 12.5 LR2 D13 16 9/13 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 16 LR2 D13 21 12/18 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 T T T T
NC100LMA 25 LR2 D13 22 17/25 0.7 0.8 T T T T
NC100LMA 40 LR2 D33 53 23/32 0.8 T T T
NC100LMA 40 LR2 D33 55 30/40 T T
NC100LMA 63 LR2 D33 57 37/50 T
NC100LMA 63 LR2 D33 59 48/65
NS80HMA 2.5 LR2 D13 06 1/1.6 T T T T T T T T T T T T
NS80HMA 2.5 LR2 D13 07 1.6/2.5 T T T T T T T T T T T T
NS80HMA 6.3 LR2 D13 08 2.5/4 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 10 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NS80HMA 6.3 LR2 D13 10 4/6 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 2 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NS80HMA 12.5 LR2 D13 12 5.5/8 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NS80HMA 12.5 LR2 D13 14 7/10 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NS80HMA 12.5 LR2 D13 16 9/13 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.5 T T T T
NS80HMA 25 LR2 D13 21 12/18 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 1 T T T
NS80HMA 25 LR2 D33 22 17/25 0.7 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1.2
NS80HMA 50 LR2 D33 53 23/32 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2
NS80HMA 50 LR2 D33 55 30/40 1.2 1.2
NS80HMA 50 LR2 D33 57 37/50 1.2
NS80HMA 80 LR2 D33 59 48/65
downstream trip unit rating (A) 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 80 100 125 160 200 250
or thermal relay réglage Ir
NS100N/H/LMA 2,5 LR2 D13 06 1/1.6 0.19 3 T T T T T T T T T T T T
NS100N/H/LMA 2.5 LR2 D13 07 1.6/2.5 0.19 3 4 5 5 5 T T T T T T T T
NS100N/H/LMA 6.3 LR2 D13 08 2.5/4 0.19 3 4 5 5 5 6.4 8 T T T T T T
NS100N/H/LMA 6.3 LR2 D13 10 4/6 3 4 5 5 5 6.4 8 T T T T T T
NS100N/H/LMA 12.5 LR2 D13 12 5.5/8 3 4 5 5 5 6.4 8 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 12.5 LR2 D13 14 7/10 4 5 5 5 6.4 8 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 12.5 LR2 D13 16 9/13 5 5 5 6.4 8 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 25 LR2 D13 21 12/18 5 6.4 8 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 25 LR2 D33 22 17/25 6.4 8 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 50 LR2 D33 53 23/32 8 12.5 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 50 LR2 D33 55 30/40 12.5 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 50 LR2 D33 57 37/50 12.5 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 100 LR2 D33 59 48/65 20 25
NS100N/H/LMA 100 LR2 D33 63 63/80 25
NS100N/H/LMA 100
NS160N/H/LMA 150
NS250N/H/LMA 220
NS400N/H/LMA 320
NS630N/H/LMA 500
NS100N/H/L STR22ME40 24/40 12.5 12.5 36 36
NS100N/H/L STR22ME50 30/50 12.5 36 36
NS100N/H/L STR22ME80 48/80 36
NS100N/H/L STR22ME100 60/100
NS160N/H/L STR22ME150 90/150
NS250N/H/L STR22ME220 131/220
NS400N/H/L STR43ME320 190/320
Nota : NC100LMA = NG125LMA
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 5 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 15 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T
T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 T T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 5 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 0.5 T T T T T T 0.5 1.2 T T T T T T
0.5 1 T T T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
1 1.2 1.2 T T T 1.2 T T T T T T
1.2 1.2 T T T 1.2 T T T T T
1.2 T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T
T T T T T
NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L NS400N/H/L C801N/H C801N/H C801L C1001N/H C1001N/H C1001L C1251N/H C1251N/H
NS250N/H/L NS630N/H/L
STR22SE* STR22SE* STR23SE* STR35SE* STR45AE STR35SE STR35SE STR45AE STR35SE STR35SE STR45AE
STR53SE STR55UE STR55UE STR55UE STR55UE STR55UE
40 100 80 160 250 400 630 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1250 1250
0.45 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 1.1 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 1.1 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 1.1 0.9 T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 1.1 0.9 T T T T T T T T T T T T
0.45 1.1 0.9 T T T T T T T T T T T T
1.1 0.9 1.75 36 T T T T T T T T T T
1.1 0.9 1.75 36 T T T T T T T 8 T T
1.1 1.75 36 T T T T T T T 8 T T
1.75 36 T T 50 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
1.75 36 T T 50 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
36 T T 50 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
36 T T 50 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
T T 50 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
T 45 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
T 40 T 6.4 T T 8 T T
40 70 8 40 70
NS160N NS400H
TM160D STR23SE
discrimination
limit in kA
30 / 30 70 / 70
C60N NS160N
63 A TM160D
cascading
limit in kA
upstream NS160H
breaking capacity 70 kA
trip unit STR22SE80 STR22SE160
thermal 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
downstream relay rating (A)
GV2 P01 integrated 0.1 to 0.16 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P02 integrated 0.16 to 0.25 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P03 integrated 0.25 to 0.40 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P04 integrated 0.40 to 0.63 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P05 integrated 0.63 to 1 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P06 integrated 1 to 1.6 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P07 integrated 1.6 to 2.5 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P08 integrated 2.5 to 4 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P10 integrated 4 to 6.3 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P14 integrated 6 to 10 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P16 integrated 9 to 14 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P20 integrated 13 to 18 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P21 integrated 17 to 23 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 P22 integrated 20 to 25 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
upstream NS160L
breaking capacity 150 kA
trip unit STR22SE80 STR22SE160
thermal 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
downstream relay rating (A)
GV2 P01 integrated 0.1 to 0.16 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P02 integrated 0.16 to 0.25 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P03 integrated 0.25 to 0.40 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P04 integrated 0.40 to 0.63 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P05 integrated 0.63 to 1 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P06 integrated 1 to 1.6 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P07 integrated 1.6 to 2.5 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P08 integrated 2.5 to 4 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P10 integrated 4 to 6.3 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P14 integrated 6 to 10 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P16 integrated 9 to 14 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P20 integrated 13 to 18 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P21 integrated 17 to 23 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 P22 integrated 20 to 25 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
upstream NS160H
breaking capacity 70 kA
trip unit STR22SE80 STR22SE160
thermal 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
downstream relay rating (A)
GV2 L03 LR2 D13 03 0.25 to 0.40 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L04 LR2 D13 04 0.40 to 0.63 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L05 LR2 D13 05 0.63 to 1 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L06 LR2 D13 06 1 to 1.6 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L07 LR2 D13 07 1.6 to 2.5 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L08 LR2 D13 08 2.5 to 4 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L10 LR2 D13 10 4 to 6.3 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L14 LR2 D13 14 7 to 10 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L16 LR2 D13 16 9 to 13 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L20 LR2 D13 21 12 to 18 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
GV2 L22 LR2 D13 22 17 to 25 70/70 70/70 70/70 70/70
upstream NS160L
breaking capacity 150 kA
trip unit STR22SE80 STR22SE160
thermal 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
downstream relay rating (A)
GV2 L03 LR2 D13 03 0.25 to 0.40 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L04 LR2 D13 04 0.40 to 0.63 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L05 LR2 D13 05 0.63 to 1 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L06 LR2 D13 06 1 to 1.6 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L07 LR2 D13 07 1.6 to 2.5 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L08 LR2 D13 08 2.5 to 4 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L10 LR2 D13 10 4 to 6.3 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L14 LR2 D13 14 7 to 10 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L16 LR2 D13 16 9 to 13 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L20 LR2 D13 21 12 to 18 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
GV2 L22 LR2 D13 22 17 to 25 150/150 150/150 150/150 150/150
A circuit supplying a motor may include one, Protection of a motor circuit involves a The necessary electrical functions are of
two, three or four switchgear or controlgear number of parameters that depend on: very different natures:
devices fulfilling one or more functions. c the application (type of machine driven, c protection (motor-dedicated for overloads);
When a number of devices are used, they operating safety, starting frequency, etc.); c control (generally with high endurance
must be coordinated to ensure optimum c the level of service continuity imposed by levels);
operation of the motor. the load or the application; c isolation.
c the applicable standards to ensure
protection of life and property.
protection functions
Disconnection functions: Overloads (I < 10 In)
E34300
ft
o
E34302
10 A, 10, 20 and 30 (maximum tripping 10 A t>2h t<2h t < 2 min. 2 i t i 10 s
ts
times at 7.2 In). 10 t>2h t<2h t < 4 min. 4 i t i 10 s
Classes 10 and 10 A are the most class 30 20 t>2h t<2h t < 8 min. 6 i t i 20 s
commonly used. Classes 20 and 30 are 30s
30 t>2h t<2h t < 12 min. 9 i t i 30 s
reserved for motors with difficult starting
class 20
conditions.
20s
The diagram and the table opposite can be
used to select a thermal relay suited to the class 10
motor starting time. 10s
1,05 lr
1,20 lr
7,2 lr
1,5 lr
l/lr
Trip classes of a thermal relay.
E41251
A squirrel-cage motor draws a high inrush
current during starting. This current is
related to the combined influence of two thermal relay
parameters:
v the high inductance of the copper stator
winding,
v the magnetisation of the iron core of the
stator. td
(0.5 to
In motor current drawn by the motor at full rated 30s)
load (in A rms)
Id current drawn by the motor during
starting (in A ms)
Id’’ subtransient current generated by the
motor when it is energised. short-circuit
This very short subtransient protection
(magnetic protection of
phenomenon is expressed as td'' the circuit breaker)
k x Id x r (in A peak). (0.010 to
0.015s)
td motor starting time, from 0.5 to 30
seconds depending on the application.
td’’ duration of the subtransient current, In motor Irm I(A)
from 0.010 to 0.015 seconds when the
motor is energised. Id" (2 to 2.5 Id in A peak)
Irm magnetic setting of the circuit breakers. Id (5.8 to 8.6 In in A rms)
Using the coordination tables for Merlin Gerin circuit breaker and Telemecanique contactors:
v Ordinary motor: minimum short-circuit protection at 19 In v The subtransient starting current is
The starter components can be selected motor (A peak). unknown or greater than 19 In motor (A
directly from the coordination tables, There are two possibilities’: peak).
whatever the values of the starting current v The subtransient starting current is known In this case, the value used for the motor
(Id from 5.8 to 8.6 In) and the subtransient (indicated by the motor manufacturer) and is power in the coordination tables should be
current. less than 19 In motor (A peak). increased by 20% to satisfy optimum starting
v High-efficiency motors with Id i 7.5 In: and coordination conditions.
In this case, the starter components can be
The starter components can be selected selected directly from the coordination Example: For a 110 kW 380/415 V 3-phase
directly from the coordination tables, tables, whatever the value of the starting motor, the selected components are those
whatever the values of the starting current current (for Id > 7.5 In). for a motor power of 110+20%=132kW:
and the subtransient current. Example: For a 110 kW 380/415 V 3-phase NS400-MA320 / LC1-F285 / LR9-F5371.
v High-efficiency motors with Id > 7.5 In motor, the selected components are:
When Merlin Gerin circuit breakers are used NS250-MA220 / LC1-F225 / LR9-F5371.
for motor currents in the neighbourhood of
their rated current, they are set to provide
E34306
line current divided by e
KM1 can be sized for the line current divided
by 3, however, for the sake of homogeneity,
it is often identical to contactors KM2 and
KM3.
The starter components are selected
from the special star-delta type 1 KM2 KM3 KM1
coordination tables. KM2 KM3 KM1
Example: Consider the following case:
c 45 kW motor supplied at 380 V;
M M
c star-delta starting;
c separate thermal relay;
c short-circuit current of 20 kA at the starter; Solution with thermal-magnetic motor circuit Solution with magnetic motor
breaker. circuit breaker.
c type 1 coordination.
The starter components are selected using
the table on page 307:
c circuit breaker: NS100N-MA 100;
c contactor: LC3-D50;
c thermal relay: LR2-D3357
E34307
Performance : U = 220/240 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS80-MA xxx 100 kA xxx
Performance : U = 220/240 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS100-MA 85 kA 100 kA 130 kA
NS160/250-MA 85 kA 100 kA 130 kA
Contactor NS400/630-MA xxx 100 kA 130 kA
Starting (1): normal LRD2 class 10 A, others class 10
Thermal relay
Performance : U = 380/415 V
Thermal-magnetic Circuit breaker N H L
motor circuit-breaker NS100-STR22ME 25 kA 70 kA 130 kA
NS160-STR22ME 35 kA 70 kA 130 kA
NS250-STR22ME 35 kA 70 kA 130 kA
Contactor NS400-STR43ME 45 kA 70 kA 130 kA
NS630-STR43ME 45 kA 70 kA 130 kA
Starting: IEC 947-4-1, type 2
STR22ME STR43ME
Normal Class 10 Class 10
Long x Class 20
Motors Circuit breaker Contactors (2)
P (kW) I (A) 380 V I (A) 415 V Ie max Type Trip unit Irth (A) Irm (A) Type
3 7 6.5 10 NS100 STR22ME 6/10 13 Irth LC1-D80
4 9 8.2 10 NS100 STR22ME 6/10 13 Irth LC1-D80
5.5 12 11 12.5 NS100 STR22ME 7.5/12.5 13 Irth LC1-D80
7.5 16 14 20 NS100 STR22ME 10/20 13 Irth LC1-D80
10 21 19 25 NS100 STR22ME 15/25 13 Irth LC1-D80
11 23 21 25 NS100 STR22ME 15/25 13 Irth LC1-D80
15 30 28 40 NS100 STR22ME 24/40 13 Irth LC1-D80
18.5 37 35 40 NS100 STR22ME 24/40 13 Irth LC1-D80
22 44 40 50 NS100 STR22ME 30/50 13 Irth LC1-D80
30 60 55 80 NS100 STR22ME 48/80 13 Irth LC1-D80
37 72 66 80 NS100 STR22ME 48/80 13 Irth LC1-D80
45 85 80 100 NS100 STR22ME 60/100 13 Irth LC1-D115 or LC1-F115
NS400 STR43ME 60/120 13 Irth LC1-F185
55 105 100 115 NS160 STR22ME 90/150 13 Irth LC1-D115 or LC1-F115
NS400 STR43ME 60/120 13 Irth LC1-F185
75 138 135 150 NS160 STR22ME 90/150 13 Irth LC1-D150 or LC1-F150
NS400 STR43ME 100/200 13 Irth LC1-F185
90 170 165 185 NS250 STR22ME 131/220 13 Irth LC1-F185
NS400 STR43ME 100/200 13 Irth LC1-F185
110 205 200 220 NS250 STR22ME 131/220 13 Irth LC1-F225
NS400 STR43ME 100/200 13 Irth LC1-F225
132 250 240 265 NS400 STR43ME 160/320 13 Irth LC1-F265
160 300 280 320 NS400 STR43ME 160/320 13 Irth LC1-F330
200 370 340 400 NS630 STR43ME 250/500 13 Irth LC1-F400
220 408 385 500 NS630 STR43ME 250/500 13 Irth LC1-F500
250 460 425 500 NS630 STR43ME 250/500 13 Irth LC1-F500
Performance : U = 380/415 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS80-MA xxx 70 kA xxx
Starting (1): normal LRD2 class 10 A, LR9 class 10
Contactor
Thermal relay
Performance : U = 380/415 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS100-MA 25 kA 70 kA 130 kA
NS160/250-MA 35 kA 70 kA 130 kA
Contactor NS400/630-MA xxx 70 kA 130 kA
Thermal relay Starting (1): normal LRD2 class 10 A, others class 10
Performance : U = 380/415 V
Magnetic circuit
breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS80 MA xxx 70 kA xxx
Contactor
Starting (1): adjustable class 10 A to 30
Thermal relay on CT
TC
Performance : U = 380/415 V
Magnetic circuit
breaker (MA) Circuit breaker N H L
NS100-MA 25 kA 70 kA 130 kA
NS160/250-MA 35 kA 70 kA 130 kA
Contactor
NS400/630-MA xxx 70 kA 130 kA
Thermal relay on CT
TC Starting: adjustable class 10 to 30
(1) Observe the recommendations on page 284 for installations with a class 30 relay and mounting of the thermal relay on the current transformer.
(2) Valid for 480 V NEMA.
(3) Reversers: replace LC1 with LC2; star-delta starter: replace LC1 with LC3.
Performance : U = 500/525 V
Thermal-magnetic Circuit breaker H L
motor circuit-breaker NS100-STR22ME 50/35 kA 70 kA
NS160-STR22ME 50/35 kA 70 kA
NS250-STR22ME 50/35 kA 70 kA
Contactor NS400-STR43ME 50/35 kA 70 kA
NS630-STR43ME 50/35 kA 70 kA
Performance : U = 500/525 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuit breaker H L
NS80-MA 35 kA xxx
Performance : U = 500/525 V
Magnetic circuit breaker (MA) Circuite breaker H L
NS100-MA 50/35 kA 70 kA
NS160/250-MA 50/35 kA 70 kA
Contactor NS400/630-MA 50/35 KA 70 kA
90 312 160 300 160 270 200 281 200 220 NS400N/H/L-MA 320 LC1-F330 LR9-F73 75 200/330
220 240
110 360 200 380 220 380 220 360 220 310 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC1-F400 LR9-F73 79 300/500
220 420 250 401 335 335 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC1-F500 LR9-F73 79 300/500
150 480 250 480 250 430 315 445 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC1-F500 LR9-F73 79 300/500
335 460
300 480 375 400 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC1-F630 LR9-F73 81 380/630
450 480
160 520 300 570 300 510 335 540 355 500 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC1-F630 LR9-F73 81 380/630
375 530 C1001L-STR35ME 1000
400 570
200 630 335 630 335 580 375 590 450 630 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC1-F630 LR9-F73 81 380/630
C1001L-STR35ME 1000
220 700 375 700 375 650 400 650 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC1-F780 LR2-F83 83 500/800
C1001L-STR35ME 1000
400 750 400 690 450 720 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC1-F780 LR2-F83 83 500/800
C1001L-STR35ME 1000
500 530 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC1-BL33 LR2-F83 83 500/800
560 580 C1001L-STR35ME 1000
250 800 450 800 450 750 500 700 C1001N/H-STR35ME 1000 LC1-BM33 LR2-F83 83 500/800
560 760
500 900 500 830 500 800 600 830 C1001N/H-STR35ME 1000 LC1-BM33 LR2-F83 85 630/1000
560 900
300 970 560 1000 560 920 600 960 670 920 C1251N/H-STR35ME 1250 LC1-BP33 LR2-F83 85 630/1000
600 1100 600 1000 670 1080 750 1020
(1) For long starting (class 20), replace the LR2-D3 relays with LR2-D5 relays.
(2) Valid for 480 V NEMA.
(3) Reversers: replace LC1 with LC2.
Starting:
Contactor
STR22ME STR43ME STR55UE
Normal Class 10 Class 10 Class 10
Long x Class 20 Class 20
Starting: normal
Star-delta
starter
Thermal relay
M
Magnetic circuit
breaker (MA) of the circuit breaker
Starting: normal
Star-delta
starter
Thermal relay
M
110 360 200 380 220 380 220 360 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC3-F265 LR9-F73 75 200/330
150 480 250 480 250 430 NS630N/H/L-MA 500 LC3-F330 LR9-F73 75 200/330
160 520 300 570 300 510 335 540 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC3-F400 LR9-F73 75 200/330
C1001L-STR35ME 1000
335 580 375 590 C801N/H-STR35ME 800 LC3-F400 LR9-F73 79 300/500
C1001L-STR35ME 1000
(1) Valid for 480 V NEMA.
Starting: normal
Star-delta
starter
When chosing a circuit breaker to protect a c the electrodynamic withstand of the Multi 9, Compact, Compact CM and
busbar trunking system, it is necessary to busbar trunking: Masterpact circuit breakers with respect to
take into account: The peak current Î limited by the circuit Telemecanique Canalis busbar trunking give
c the usual rules concerning the circuit breaker must be less than the directly, for the different types of trunking
breaker current settings: electrodynamic withstand capacity (or rated and circuit breakers, the maximum short-
Ib i Ir i Inc where peak current) of the busbar trunking. circuit current for which the trunking is
Ib = maximum load current protected.
Ir = circuit breaker current setting Coordination tables
Inc = current rating of the busbar trunking The tables for coordinating Merlin Gerin
E40701
E40700
Example
Consider two 630 kVA/400 V transformer What circuit breakers should be chosen
(Usc 4 %) supplying a main LV switchboard for CB1 and CB2 to protect the
for which the prospective short-circuit installation against short-circuits ?
current on the busbars is 44 kA.
From the switchboard, a 30-metre long CB1 CB2
Canalis KVA63 transmission electrical prospective Isc 44 kA 33 kA
busbar trunking system (630A) supplies a circuit breakers NS630N (45 kA breaking NS160N (35 kA breaking
capacity) capacity)
Canalis KSA63 trunking system (630A) for
Isc protection level for KVA63 45 kA
distribution with high-density tap-offs.
trunking
A tap-off on the KSA63 trunking supplies a
Isc protection level for KVA63 45 kA
Canalis KSA16 trunking system. trunking
The short-circuit level are respectively: Isc protection level for KSA16 35 kA
c 44 kA downstream of circuit-breaker CB1 trunking
and at the upstream connection of the
KVA63 trunking.
c 33 kA at the junction between the KVA63
transmission trunking and the KSA63
E39613
prospective Isc
44 kA
LV main
swichboard
D1 Disconnector ?
prospective Isc prospective Isc
44 kA 33 kA
Canalis KSA 63
a 30-meter KVA63
transmission EBT
system
D2 Disconnector ?
Canalis KSA
coordination tables between Merlin Gerin circuit breakers and Telemecanique Canalis
electrical busbar trunking
Voltage : 380/415 V
type of Canalis busbar trunking KLE-16/20 KBA-25 KBB-25 KBA-40 KBB-40 KN-04 KN-06 KN-10
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 16/20 25 25 40 40 40 63 100
type of circuit breaker Multi 9 C60N16/20 10
Isc max. in kA ms. C60H16/20 15
C60L16/20 25
C60N25 10 10
C60H25 15 15
C60L25 25 25
NC100LH25 50 50
C60N40 10 10 10
C60H40 15 15 15
C60L40 25 25 25
NC100LH40 50 50 50
C60N63 10
C60H63 15
C60L63 15
NC100LH63 50
NS100N (1) 25 25 25
NS100H (1) 25 25 25
NS100L (1) 25 25 25
(1) TM-D trip unit, rating 40 or 63 or 100 A and STR22SE rating 40 or 100 A
type of Canalis busbar trunking KSA-10 KSA-16 KSA-25 KSA-40 KSA-50 KSA-63 KSA-80
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 100 160 250 400 500 630 800
type of circuit breaker Compact NS100N 25 25
Isc max. in kA ms. NS100H 25 70
NS100L 25 90
NS160N 20 36 36
NS160H 20 70 70
NS160L 20 70 150
NS250N 17 36 36
NS250H 17 55 70
NS250L 17 55 150
NS400N 30 45 45
NS400H 30 45 70
NS400L 30 45 150
NS630N 30 45 45 45 45
NS630H 30 70 70 70 70
NS630L 30 150 150 150 150
C801N 26 30 40 50
C801H 26 30 40 50
C801L 30 40 55 80
C1001N 40 50
C1001H 40 50
C1001L 55 80
C1251N 50
C1251H 50
CMN 24 26 32 38
Masterpact M08N1 24 26 32 38
M10N1 24 26 32 38
M12N1 24 26 32 38
M08H1 24 26 32 38
M10H1 24 26 32 38
M12H1 24 26 32 38
M08H2 24 26 32 38
M10H2 24 26 32 38
M12H2 24 26 32 38
M08L1 24 32 40 50
M10L1 24 32 40 50
M12L1 24 32 40 50
voltage : 380/415 V
type of Canalis busbar trunking KVA-20 KVA-31 KVA-40 KVA-50 KVA-63 KVA-80
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 200 315 400 500 630 800
type of circuit breaker Compact NS250N 35
Isc max. in kA ms. NS250H 70
NS250L 100
NS400N 35 45 45 45 45
NS400H 35 70 70 70 70
NS400L 35 150 150 150 150
NS630N 45 45 45 45
NS630H 70 70 70 70
NS630L 150 150 150 150
C801N 40 50
C801H 40 60
C801L 70 110
C1001N 40 50
C1001H 40 60
C1001L 70 110
Masterpact M08N1 33 40
M10N1 33 40
M08H1 33 40
M10H1 33 40
M08H2 33 40
M10H2 33 40
M08L1 40 55
M10L1 40 55
type of Canalis busbar trunking KTA-10 KTA-12 KTA-16 KTA-20 KTA-25 KTA-30 KTA-40
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
type of circuit breaker Compact C1001N 50 50
Isc max. in kA ms. C1001H 55 70
C1001L 100 150
C1251N 50 50
C1251H 55 70
Masterpact M10N1 40 40 40 40
M12N1 40 40 40 40
M16N1 40 40 40 40
M20N1 55 55 55 55
M25N1 55 55 55 55
M10H1 40 50 60 65
M12H1 40 50 60 65
M16H1 40 50 60 65
M20H1 60 73 75 75
M25H1 60 73 75 75
M32H1 75 75 75
M40H1 75 75 75
M50H1 90
M10H2 40 50 60 73
M12H2 40 50 60 73
M16H2 40 50 60 73
M20H2 60 73 80 86
M25H2 60 73 80 86
M32H2 80 86 90
M40H2 80 86 90
M50H2 90
M10L1 55 85 130
M12L1 55 85 130
M16L1 65 105 130 130
M20L1 65 105 130 130
M25L1 65 105 130 130
voltage: 660/690 V
type of Canalis busbar trunking KSA-10 KSA-16 KSA-25 KSA-40 KSA-50 KSA-63 KSA-80
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 100 160 250 400 500 630 800
type of circuit breaker Compact NS100N 8 8
Isc max. in kA ms. NS100H 10 10
NS100L 20 75
NS160N 8 8 8
NS160H 10 10 10
NS160L 20 75 75
NS250N 8 8 8
NS250H 10 10 10
NS250L 15 20 20
NS400N 10 10 10
NS400H 17 20 20
NS400L 14 28 35
NS630N 10 10 10 20
NS630H 20 20 20 20
NS630L 35 35 35 35
C801N 25 25 25 25
C801H 26 29 35 40
C801L 26 30 45 60
C1001N 25 25
C1001H 35 40
C1001L 45 60
C1251N 25
C1251H 40
CMN 24 26 32 38
Masterpact M08N1 24 26 32 38
M10N1 24 26 32 38
M12N1 24 26 32 38
M08H1 24 26 32 38
M10H1 24 26 32 38
M12H1 24 26 32 38
M08H2 24 26 32 38
M10H2 24 26 32 38
M12H2 24 26 32 38
M08L1 24 26 32 38
M10L1 24 26 32 38
M12L1 24 26 32 38
type of Canalis busbar trunking KVA-20 KVA-31 KVA-40 KVA-50 KVA-63 KVA-80
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 200 315 400 500 630 800
type of circuit breaker Compact NS250N 8
Isc max. in kA ms. NS250H 10
NS250L 20
NS400N 10 10 10 10 10
NS400H 20 20 20 20 20
NS400L 20 75 75 75 75
NS630N 10 10 10 10
NS630H 20 20 20 20
NS630L 35 35 35 35
C801N 33 25
C801H 33 40
C801L 50 60
C1001N 33 25
C1001H 33 40
C1001L 50 60
Masterpact M08N1 33 40
M10N1 33 40
M08H1 33 40
M10H1 33 40
M08H2 33 40
M10H2 33 40
M08L1 33 40
M10L1 33 40
type of Canalis busbar trunking KTA-10 KTA-12 KTA-16 KTA-20 KTA-25 KTA-30 KTA-40
trunking rating (in A at 35°C) 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000
type of circuit breaker Compact C1001N 25 25
Icc maxi en kA eff. C1001H 40 40
C1001L 60 60
C1251N 25 25
C1251H 40 40
Masterpact M10N1 40 40 40 40
M12N1 40 40 40 40
M16N1 40 40 40 40
M20N1 40 40 40 55
M25N1 40 40 40 55
M10H1 40 50 60 65
M12H1 40 50 60 65
M16H1 40 50 60 65
M20H1 60 65 65 75
M25H1 60 65 65 75
M32H1 75 75 75
M40H1 75 75 75
M50H1 85
M10H2 40 50 60 73
M12H2 40 50 60 73
M16H2 40 50 60 73
M20H2 60 73 80 85
M25H2 60 73 80 85
M32H2 80 85 85
M40H2 80 85 85
M50H2 85
M10L1 40 50 65
M12L1 40 50 65
M16L1 50 65 65 65
M20L1 50 65 65 65
M25L1 50 65 65 65
voltage: 660/690 V
type of Canalis busbar trunking KTC-10 KTC-13 KTC-16 KTC-20 KTC-25 KTC-30 KTC-40 KTC-50
trunking rating (in A at 35 °C) 1000 1350 1600 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000
type of circuit breaker Compact C1001N 25 25
Isc max. in kA ms. C1001H 40 40
C1001L 60 60
C1251N 25 25
C1251H 40 40
Masterpact M10N1 40 40 40 40
M12N1 40 40 40 40
M16N1 40 40 40 40
M20N1 40 40 40 55
M25N1 40 40 40 55
M10H1 40 50 60 65
M12H1 40 50 60 65
M16H1 40 50 60 65
M20H1 60 65 65 75
M25H1 60 65 65 75
M32H1 75 75 75
M40H1 75 75 75
M50H1 85 85
M63H1 85 85
M10H2 40 50 60 73
M12H2 40 50 60 73
M16H2 40 50 60 73
M20H2 60 73 80 82
M25H2 60 73 80 82
M32H2 80 82 85
M40H2 80 82 85
M50H2 85 85
M63H2 85 85
M10L1 55 65 65
M12L1 55 65 65
M16L1 50 65 65 65
M20L1 50 65 65 65
M25L1 50 65 65 65
Circuit breaker selection taking The use of current-limiting circuit breakers Coordination techniques are described and
coordination into account makes it possible to implement coordination recognised by the following standards:
techniques. This improves circuit breaker c product standards IEC 947-1 and 947-2;
performance in terms of breaking capacity c installation standards IEC 364,
and continuity of service. NF C15-100, etc.
E40703
E40702
of a downstream circuit breaker.
Reinforced
break. cap.
70 kA
E40705
upstream busbar trunking systems, the
tables below give directly:
CB1 = NS400H
c the level of short-circuit protection of the
busbar trunking;
c the downstream circuit breaker and
associated busbar trunking;
c the cascading breaking capacity of the KSA40 (400 A)
downstream circuit breaker;
c the level of reinforced discrimination of the
upstream and downstream circuit breakers;
c the level of reinforced protection of the
downstream busbar trunking. CB2 = NS160N
KSA16 (160 A)
70 kA
E39614
upstream
circuit breaker
level of protection
of the upstream
busbar trunking upstream
reinforced cascading busbar trunking
and discrimination
between the 2 circuit
breakers
downstream
circuit breaker
rated current of the upstream busbar trunking: 1200 and 1350 A (cont.)
Upstream circuit breaker C1251H C1251H
Associated trip unit STR35SE / STR55UE STR45AE
Upstream busbar trunking KTA-12 / KTC-13 KTA-12 / KTC-13
1200 and 1350 A 1200 and 1350 A
Level of protection of the 70 70
upstream busbar trunking (kA)
Downstream circuit breaker NS100N NS160N NS250N NS400N NS630N NS100N NS160N NS250N NS400N NS630N
Associated trip unit TMD / STR22SE STR23SE / STR53UE TMD / STR22SE STR23SE / STR53UE
Downstream busbar trunking KSA KSA KSA KSA / KVA / KVC KSA KSA KSA KSA / KVA / KVC
100 A 160 A 250 A 315 - 400 A 500 - 630 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 315 - 400 A 500 - 630 A
Discrimination limit between
upstream and downstream
circuit breakers (kA) 70 70 70 45 40 70 70 70 70 70
Reinforced breaking capacity
of the downstream
circuit breaker (kA) 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Reinforced protection of the
downstream busbar trunking(kA) 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
Compact
80 to 1250 A
catalogue numbers
page
Compact NS80H-MA
complete device 328
accessories 328
Compact NSC100N
complete device 329
accessories 329
Compact and Vigicompact
NS100 to 250
complete device 330
comprising 334
installation and connection 336
accessories 337
Compact NS100 single-pole 341
Compact and Vigicompact
NS400 to 630
complete device 342
installation and connection 344
comprising 345
accessories 346
Compact and Vigicompact
C801 to 1251
complete device 350
installation and connection 351
comprising 352
accessories 353
source changeover
catalogue numbers
page
complete device
Compact NS80H-MA with built-in trip unit MA
accessories
long terminal shields (1 pair)
connection accessories 3P 28034
voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MX MN
48 28070 28080
110/130 28071 28081
220/240 28072 28082
380/415 28073 28083
440/480 28074 28084
DC voltage (V) MX MN
24 28075 28085
48 28076 28086
110/125 28077 28087
250 28078 28088
MN 220/240 V AC with time delay 29421
composed of: MN 250 DC 28088
delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
direct rotary handle
rotary handles standard black handle 28050
ON
red handle on yellow front 28051
I
tripped ∅5...8
reset
O
OFF
indication auxiliary
2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
complete device
Compact NSC100N with built-in MA trip unit
Compact NSC100N fixed/FC
rating 3P 3t 4P 4t
TM16D 28120 28130
TM20D 28121 28131
TM25D 28122 28132
TM32D 28123 28133
TM40D 28124 28134
TM50D 28125 28135
TM63D 28126 28136
TM70D 28127 28137
TM80D 28128 28138
TM100D 28129 28139
accessories
Vigi module 0,03/3A
Vigi module bottom connection 3P 28000
4P 28001
T R top connection 3P 28002
4P 28003
voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MX MN
42 28069
48 28070
110/130 28071
208 28067
220/240 28072
277 28068
380/415 28073
440/480 28074
DC voltage (V) MX MN
24 28075
48 28076
125 28077
250 28078
direct rotary handles
rotary handles standard black handle 28050
ON
I
red handle on yellow front 28051
MCC conversion accessory 28054
O
OFF
O
OFF
ON
I
tripped ∅5...8
reset
O
OFF
indication auxiliary
2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
complete device
Compact NS100/160/250N with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
4
Im
5
TM63D 29622 29632 29642 29652
6
29621
Ir Im
29641
Ir 8
.9
.85 .95 2
10
.8 1.5
xIr
.98
.7
1
.63
40 30773 30783
push
to
trip STR
90 %Ir Hz test
105 50/60
Im
5 alarm
4 6
Ir
100 30771
.9 3
30781
.85 .95 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
push
to
trip
Vigicompact NS160N fixed/FC
rating 3P 3t 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
40 30973 30983
100 30971 30981
160 30970 30980
complete device
Compact NS100/160/250H with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100H fixed/FC
rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
TM16D 29675 29685 29695
TM25D 29674 29684 29694
TM32D 29677 29687 29697
TM40D 29673 29683 29693
TM50D 29676 29686 29696
push
to
trip
4
Im
5
6
TM63D 29672 29682 29692
3 Ir Im
40 30793 30803
push
to
trip STR
90 %Ir Hz test
105 50/60
Im
5 alarm
4 6
Ir
complete device
Compact NS100/160/250L with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100L fixed/FC
rating 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
TM16D 29715 29725 29735
TM25D 29714 29724 29734
TM32D 29717 29727 29737
TM40D 29713 29723 29733
TM50D 29716 29726 29736
push
to
trip
4
Im
5
6
TM63D 29712 29722 29732
3 Ir Im
Im
5 alarm
90 %Ir
105
STR
22 DE
50/60
Hz test
40 30813 30823
Ir 6
comprising:
fixed/FC basic frame
2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
NS100N 29000 29003 29008
NS100H 29004 29009
NS100L 29005 29010
NS160N 30400 30403 30408
NS160H 30404 30409
NS160L 30405 30410
push
to
trip
+ trip unit
Ir 4
Im
5
6
90 %Ir
105
alarm
STR
50/60
22 DE
Hz test
standard protection: trip unit TM-D
.9
rating 3P 2t 3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+Nr
3
.85 .95 8 Ir Im
.8 2
.98 10
1.5
.7 xIr
1
.63
xIn
accessories
rear connections
connection accessories 2 short 29235
(Cu or Al) 2 long 29236
terminal extensions
right-angle terminal extensions set of 3 29261
set of 4 29262
straight terminal extensions set of 3 29263
set of 4 29264
spreaders 3P 31563
4P 31564
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
crimp lugs for copper cable
for cable 120❏ set of 3 29252
set of 4 29256
for cable 150❏ set of 3 29253
set of 4 29257
for cable 185❏ set of 3 29254
set of 4 29258
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
crimp lugs for aluminium cable
for cable 150❏ set of 3 29504
set of 4 29505
for cable 185❏ set of 3 29506
set of 4 29507
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
terminal shields
short (1 pair) 3P 29321
4P 29322
. consult us
accessories
auxiliary switch (changeover)
connection accessories OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
(Cu or Al) OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA 29451
voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MX MN
24 29384 29404
48 29385 29405
110/130 29386 29406
200/280 29387 29407
380/440 29388 29408
525/600 29389 29409
DC voltage (V) MX MN
12 29382 29402
24 29390 29410
30 29391 29411
48 29392 29412
60 29383 29403
125 29393 29413
250 29394 29414
MN 48 V AC with time delay 29420
composed of: MN 48 V DC 29412
delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
MN 220/240 V AC with time delay 29422
composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
delay unit of 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
motor mechanism modules
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MT100/160 MT250
48/60 29440 2
31548
110/130 29433 31540
1
220/240 29434
I
31541
auto
manu/ O ON
push
OFF
push
1
I
31549
manu/au ON
push
OFF
push
ammeter module
indication and rating (A) 100 160 250
measurement modules 3P
4P A
29455
29456
30555
30556
31565
31566
29342
standard extended rotary handle
ON
standard extended rotary handle 29338
29340
I
29343
ON
OFF
accessories
locking devices 29344
ON
I
keylocks
Ronis 1351.500 41940
pr
of
al
O
ux
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
OFF
front-panel escutcheons
installation accessories toggle 29315
Vigi module 29316
rotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40 29317
Vigi module or ammeter IP405 29318
standard 29268
Vigi module 29269
safety trip for advanced opening 29270
parts of withdrawable kit
fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 29282
moving part (for circuit breaker) 29283
push
to
trip
accessories
10 lever extensions 29313
spare parts screwbag 29312
12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC)
M6 for NS100N/H/L 29234
M8 for NS160/250N/H/L 30554
100 identification labels 29314
sheet-metal enclosure IP547 for
individual enclosures Compact NS100/160 29463
Vigicompact NS100/160 29464
Compact NS250 31571
push
to
trip
4P 31538
upline connection (Visu block)
terminal 1 cable 3P 29220
4P 29221
right-angle terminal extensions 3P 29261
4P 29262
straight terminal extensions 3P 29263
4P 29264
spreaders 3P 31563
4P 31564
upline + downline connection
long rear connections 1 pole 29219
terminal shields short 3P 29222
4P 29223
long 3P 29224
4P 29225
auxiliary connection
auxiliary switch OF or CAM advance on opening, 42906
depending on set-up
earthing contact for neutral in “OFF” position 42415
locking of Visu module in “OFF” position
by 3 padlocks (not supplied) built-in
1 Ronis key lock 1351.500 41940
1 Profalux key lock KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
accessories for Trayvou L 1P 1E lock 42417
test kits
test kits mini test kit 43362
accessories
rear connections
connection 2 short 29235
accessories 2 long 29236
pads
right-angle terminal extensions set of 2 29250
terminal shields
short (1 pair) 1P 29320
short (2 pairs) 2P (2x) 29320
toggle locking device for 3 padlocks
locks removable 29370
front-panel escutcheons
installation accessories with toggles 29315
STR23SE
3P 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
Compact NS400N fixed/FC 150 A 32719 32720
250 A 32707 32708
400 A 32693 32694
Compact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32893 32894
STR53UE
3P 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
push
90 %Ir
105
alarm
23 SE Im5
STR
4
Ir .93 6
test
STR53UE
3P 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
push
to
trip
alarm
90 %Ir
105
Compact NS400H fixed/FC 150 A 32727 32728
23 SE Im5
250 A 32715
STR
32716
4
Ir .93 6
.9 3
Io .95 8 Im
Ir
.8 .88 2
.63 .98 10
1.5 Ir
.85 x
1
1 .8
x Io
.5
400 A
x In
STR53UE
3P 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
push
to
Compact NS400L fixed/FC 150 A 32729 32730
trip
STR
23 SE
Ir .93
3
4
Im5
alarm
6
90 %Ir
105
400A
Io Ir
Im
32703 32704
.8 .88 2
.63 .98 10
1.5 Ir
.85 x
1
1 .8
x Io
.5
x In
test
MA500
3P
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32950
Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32951
MP2
3P
Compact NS400H fixed/FC 32743
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32943
MP3
3P
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32944
push
to
trip
Vigicompact NS400/630N
Vigicompact equiped of MB Vigi module (220 to 440 V)
STR23SE
3P 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
Vigicompact NS400N fixed/FC 32733 32734
Vigicompact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32933 32934
push
to
trip
4P 32493
+ trip unit
electronic trip unit STR23SE
3P, 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
STR23SE 32420
electronic trip unit STR53UE(basic offer)
3P, 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
STR53UE F 32424
electronic trip unit STR53UE(with options)
3P, 4P 3t, 4t, 3t+rN
%Ir
105
90
75 I
60 6
4
53 UE Im5 8
STR 4 3
Ir .93 6 10
.9 3 2
Io .95 8 12
1.5 up x In
32425
.8 2
STR53UE FT
.88 pick-
.63 .98 10
1.5 Ir
.85 up x
1 pick-
1 .8 et x Io .3
.3
.5 curr.s tm .2
240 (s) .2
x In tr 120 .1
60 .1
0
0 2t off
I
32426
30 240 on
STR53UE FI
15
1.5 Ir
tr test (s) at
tm
Im I
Ir
push
to
trip
accessories
rear connections
connection accessories 2 short 32475
(Cu or Al) 2 long 32476
terminal extensions
right-angle terminal extensions set of 3 32484
set of 4 32485
edgewise pads set of 3 32486
set of 4 32487
spreaders 52,5 mm 3P 32490
4P 32491
70 mm 3P 32492
4P 32493
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
crimp lugs for copper cable
for cable 240❏ set of 3 32500
set of 4 32501
for cable 300❏ set of 3 32502
set of 4 32503
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
crimp lugs for aluminium cable
for cable 240❏ set of 3 32504
set of 4 32505
for cable 300❏ set of 3 32506
set of 4 32507
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
terminal shields
short, 45 mm (1 pair) 3P 32562
4P 32563
long, 45 mm (1 pair) 3P 32564
4P 32565
voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MX MN
24 29384 29404
48 29385 29405
110/130 29386 29406
200/280 29387 29407
380/480 29388 29408
525/600 29389 29409
DC voltage (V) MX MN
12 29382 29402
24 29390 29410
30 29391 29411
48 29392 29412
60 29383 29403
125 29393 29413
250 29394 29414
MN 48 V AC with time delay 29420
composed of: MN 48 V DC 29412
delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
MN 220/240 V AC with time delay 29422
composed of: MN 250 V DC 29414
delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
motor mechanism modules
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V) MT400 MT630
48/60 32639 2
32839
110/130 32640 1
32840
I
accessories
direct rotary handle
rotary handles standard black handle 32597
red handle on yellow front
ON
I 32599
MCC conversion accessory 32606
O
32602
extended rotary handle
ON
standard extended rotary handle 32598
32600
I
32603
ON
OFF
accessories
locking devices 32604
ON
I
keylocks
Ronis 1351.500 41940
pr
of
al
O
ux
OFF
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 32605
2 early-make switches 29346
toggle locking device for 3 padlocks
locks, interlocking removable 29370
fixed 32631
interlocking
mechanical for circuit breakers with rotary handles 29347
mechanical for circuit breakers with toggles 32614
keylock type Ronis 41950
(2 locks, 1 key) Profalux 42878
Vigi 32519
safety trip for advanced opening 32520
parts of withdrawable kit
fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 32532
moving part (for circuit breaker) 32533
push
to
trip
Visu module
equipped with Visu module NS400 3P 32459
4P 32460
NS630 (*) 3P 32823
4P 32824
(*) Earth fault protection provided by a Vigirex relay (not possible with a Vigi module).
push
to
trip
STR35SE
3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
Compact C801N fixed/FC 46720 46721 46722 46723
Compact C1001N fixed/FC 46745 46746 46747 46748
Compact C1251N fixed/FC 46790 46791 46792 46793
STR45AE
3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
Compact C801N fixed/FC 46060 46061 46062 46063
Compact C1001N fixed/FC 46065 46066 46067 46068
Compact C1251N fixed/FC 46070 46071 46072 46073
STR35SE
3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
Compact C801H fixed/FC 46725 46726 46727 46728
Compact C1001H fixed/FC 46750 46751 46752 46753
Compact C1251H fixed/FC 46795 46796 46797 46798
STR45AE
3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
Compact C801H fixed/FC 46080 46081 46082 46083
Compact C1001H fixed/FC 46085 46086 46087 46088
Compact C1251H fixed/FC 46090 46091 46092 46093
STR45BE
3P 3t 4P 3t 4P 4t 4P 3t+rN
Compact C801L fixed/FC 46740 46741 46742 46743
Compact C1001L fixed/FC 46755 46756 46757 46758
comprising:
fixed/FC basic frame
3P 4P
Compact C801N 46101 46102
Compact C801H 46104 46105
Compact C801L 46119 46120
Compact C1001N 46107 46108
Compact C1001H 46110 46111
Compact C1001L 46122 46123
Compact C1251N 46113 46114
Compact C1251H 46116 46117
Compact C1251N 1000V 400 A 46031
800 A 46032
1250 A 46033
+ electronic trip unit
standard protection (distribution)
3P, 4P
Ir
.9
.85 .95
Ir
.8
.9 .98
.85 .95
Ir .7 1
.8
.9 .98 .63
.85 xIn
.95
.7 1
.8 Ir
.98 .63
xIn .9
.7 .85 .95
1 Ir
.63 .8
xIn .9 .98
.85 .95
Ir .7 1
.8
.9 .98 .63
.85 xIn
.95
Ir .7 1
.8
.9 .98 .63
T .85 xIn
.95
.7 1
Ir .8
STR25DE N/H/L
.9 .98 .63
46500
xIn
.85 .95 .7 1
.8 .63
.98 xIn
.7 1
.63
xIn
fixed/FC spreaders
1 upline or downline clearance 3P 46864
4P 46865
sealable terminal shields
short (1 piece) 3P 46993
4P 46992
long (1 piece) 3P 46999
4P 46995
auxiliary switch
electrical auxiliaries 1 OF + 1 SD 44900
3 OF + 1 SD 44901
1 CAM for rotary handle 44827
changeover micro-contact "plugged-in" position 46963
"withdrawn" position 46837
SDE contact Compact T with remote control 46962
Compact TS with remote control 46967
voltage releases
MX AC 50/60 Hz or DC voltage (V)
(shunt trip) 24 44910
48/60 44911
110/130 44912
220/300 44913
380/480 44914
MN AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V)
(undervoltage 48 (50 Hz) 44924
release) 110/130 44925
220/250 44926
380/415 44932
440 (60 Hz) 44932
DC voltage (V)
24/30 44923
48 44924
110/130 44925
250 44926
300 44932
MN 220/240 V AC with time delay 44927
composed of: MN 250 V DC 44926
delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
auxiliary wire block
moving part short wires N/H type 3 term. 42942
6 term. 42943
long wire L type 3 term. 42944
6 term. 42945
N/H/L type 10 term. 46894
fixed part all types 3 term. 42940
6 term. 42941
10 term. 46893
pack of 24 female clips 42946
disconnectable socket for auxiliary circuits
socket (6 wires) with plunger extension for testing 46841
additional socket (6 wires) 41928
testing devices
battery operated (battery not included) 43362
accessories
motor mechanism modules T801/1001/1251
motor mechanism modules AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V)
110/127 46928
220/240 46929
380/415 46930
440/480 46931
DC voltage (V)
24 46917
48/60 46918
110/125 46919
220/250 46920
motor mechanism modules TS801/1001/1251
AC 50/60 Hz voltage (V)
110/127 46876
220/240 46877
DC voltage (V)
48/60 46880
110/125 46874
specific accessories for remote controls
locking device for Ronis key lock 1351.500 44876
or Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
(lock not supplied, cannot be fitted on source changeover system)
1 Ronis key lock 1351.500 41945
1 Profalux key lock KS5 B24 D4Z 42900
direct rotary handles
rotary handles standard with black toggle 46933
wateright shield (CNOMO) 44940
circuit label-holder
set of 10 42976
accessories
cover
spare parts 3P/4P 46997
extended toggle
standard 46998
long for extended escutcheon (withdrawable device) 46996
toggle for
rotary handle black 46970
red 46971
visu module V801 to V1251 47759
source changeover
catalogue numbers
page
357
Compact: catalogue numbers
Compact NS100 to NS630
Compact C801 to C1251
source changeover
660V
9
AC3-IEC292-1
GERIN
0 . OFF MERLIN
GERIN
R
UR
N
440 V 60 Hz
UN =
O
0,5s
660V
UN
29471
N
29470
I 0,5s
ON /
I /O
Test ON / OFF R
1
UN =
/O
OFF
Test
fault
fault
stop
test
manu
GERIN O
MERLIN UN =
29472 29473
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / /O 1
OFF UN =
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
connection accessories
downstream coupling accessories
"normal" /"replacement"
NS100...250 /NS100...250 250 A 3P 29358
4P 29359
NS400...630 /NS400...630 630 A 3P 32619
4P 32620
.7
.85
.63
Ir
xIn
.9
1
.95
.98
3
2
4
1.5
Im
xIr
5
10
6
8
Ir Im
3
plug-in (if NS400...630 with NS100...250)
6
6
.9
.85 .95 2
10
.8 1.5
xIr
.98
.7
1
.63
xIn
660V
0 . OFF
AC3-IEC292-1
GERIN
MERLIN
9
multi
P25M
660V
AC3-IEC292-1
GERIN
Test
MERLIN O
UN =
N
Test
UR 0,5s
R
fault
stop
test
manu
11 note: the cable (12) between ACP and BA/UA must be produced
by the person doing the installation
B U S
GERIN O
MERLIN UN =
N
UR
R
UN
N I
ON /
I R
ON / /O 1
OFF UN =
/O
OFF
fault
fault
auto
stop
test
manu r
STOP
generato
12
R
1
1 7 3 8
0 Ir Im I
24 Merlin Gerin
other functions Test
Test connector in front (8) for connection
to a mini test kit or calibration test kit
(see page 0049) to check circuit breaker
operation.
Indications
Load indication (LED) in front (7);
c lit at 90% of Ir setting threshold;
c flashing at 105% or more of Ir setting
threshold.
Setting example
E25979
What is the overload protection threshold of Io Ir
an NS250 equipped with trip unit STR22SE
- 160 A rating where Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8? .8 .9 .9 .93
Answer: .7 1 .88 .95
In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A.
.63 .85 .98
.5 .8 1
x In x Io
160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A
Merlin Gerin 25
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of LV distribution networks
trip units for Compact NS400 and NS630
E23161
electronic trip units STR23SE or STR53UE.
4 circuit breaker ratings are available: STR23SE
v NS400: 150, 250 and 400 A,
STR53UE
v NS630: 630 A;
c for DC networks, the Compact NS400/630 STR23SE
are equipped with MP trip units (magnetic,
non interchangeable). STR53UE
MP
Trip units STR23SE and STR53UE For example, trip unit STR23SE with
Protection for all types of loads, from 60 to maximum settings, has a tripping threshold
630 A, is possible with only two catalogue of:
numbers: v 250 A, if mounted on a Compact NS400 -
c trip units STR23SE and STR53UE can be 250 A rating,
mounted on all Compact NS400 and NS630, v 630 A, if mounted on a Compact NS630;
types N, H or L. Trip unit STR53UE offers a c electronic trip units adapt to both 3P and
greater number of protection settings and 4P circuit breakers. 4P circuit breakers are
optional indication, measurement and equipped as standard with a sealable three-
communication functions; position neutral protection setting: 3d
c trip units do not have a predefined rating. (neutral unprotected), 4d (neutral protection
The tripping threshold depends only on the at Ir), 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5
circuit breaker rating and the long time times Ir) where Ir is the trip unit current
protection setting. setting.
26 Merlin Gerin
electronic trip unit STR23SE
E21003
t
E24094
8 1 7 3 1
90
2
STR 23 SE alarm
105 %Ir
Io Ir Im
.8 .9 .9 .93 5 6
.7 1 .88 .95 4 7
.63 .85 .98 3 8
3
.5 .8 1 2 10
x In x Io x Ir
Ir Im
4
+ -
test
5
0 Ir Im I
Merlin Gerin 27
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of LV distribution networks
trip units for Compact NS400 and NS630 (cont.)
E21004
1
E33944
8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 7
6
2
STR 53 UE %Ir >Ir >Isd >Ig test fault
7
Io Ir Isd Ii Ig µP
.8 .9 .9 .93 4 5 4 6 .5 .6
.7 1 .88 .95 3 6 3 8 .4 .7 > Ir 3
.6 .85 .98 2 8 2 10 .3 .8 A
tr
.5
x In
1 .8
x Io
1 1.5
x Ir
10 1.5
x In
11 .2
x In
1 > Im 4
tsd
tr tsd tg > Ih
test 8 16 .3 .3 .4 .4 In I1 I2 I3
4 (s).2 (s) .3 5
+ - .2
.1
.3
.2
Ir Isd li
2 .1 .2
1 16 0 0 .1 .1
0 Ir Isd Ii I
other functions Overload indications (%Ir) occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault
c LED goes on when the current exceeds goes off after about 10 minutes to conserve
0.9Ir; battery power.The information is however
c LED flashes when the current exceeds the stored in memory and the LED can be re-
long-time threshold Ir. illuminated by pressing the battery/LED test
Fault indications pushbutton (9). The LED automatically goes
LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused off and the memory is cleared when the
tripping: circuit breaker is reset.
c overload (LT protection) or abnormal Test
component temperature (>Ir); c test connector in front (8) for connection to
c short-circuit (ST or instantaneous a mini test kit or calibration test kit (see page
protection) (>Isd); 73) to check circuit breaker operation after
c earth fault (if earth fault protection option is fitting the trip unit or other accessories;
present) (>Ig); c test button (9) for (%Ir), (>Ir), (>Isd) and
c microprocessor malfunction (both (>Ir) and (>Ig) LEDs and battery.
(>Isd) LEDs go on, plus the (>Ig) LED if the Self-monitoring
earth fault protection option is present). The circuit breaker trips for:
Battery powered. Spare batteries are c microprocessor faults;
supplied in an adapter box. When a fault c abnormal temperatures.
MP
Im(A)
30005000
4400
2500
3800 3500
5700
2000 4000
In Im
28 Merlin Gerin
options for electronic trip unit STR53UE
"earth fault" protection (T) type residual current
tripping threshold Ig adjustable (8 settings)
0.2 to 1 x In
accuracy ± 15%
tripping time (ms) maximum overcurrent adjustable (4 settings + constant "I2t =
function")
time before tripping 60 140 230 350
total breaking time i 140 i 230 i 350 i 500
zone selective interlocking A number of circuit breakers are The trip unit STR53UE can only handle the
interconnected one after another by a pilot- downstream end of a zone selective
(ZSI) wire. interlocking function. Consequently, the
In the event of a short-time or earth fault: zone selective interlocking option cannot be
c if a given trip unit STR53UE detects the implemented between two Compact NS
fault, it informs the upstream circuit breaker circuit breakers.
which applies the set time delay;
c if the trip unit STR53UE does not detect Opto-electronic outputs
the fault, the upstream circuit breaker trips The use of opto-transistors ensures total
after its shortest time delay. isolation between the internal circuits of the
In this way, the fault is cleared rapidly by the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.
nearest circuit breaker. In addition, the
thermal stresses on the circuits are
minimised and time discrimination is
maintained throughout the installation.
communication (COM) Transmission of data to Digipact distribution c cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit,
monitoring and control modules. etc.).
Transmitted data:
c settings;
c phase and neutral currents (rms values);
c highest current of the three phases;
c overload condition alarm;
Merlin Gerin 29
Compact: functions and characteristics
protection of low-voltage distribution networks
trip units for Compact NS100 to NS250
E23160
(TM) or electronic (STR22SE) trip units.
All trip units may be installed on all circuit
breakers (NS100, NS160 and NS250, TM-D
types N, H and L). However a mechanical
mismatch feature prevents installation of
STR22SE
a trip unit on a circuit breaker with
a lower rating.
TM-G
STR22GE
TM-D
TM-G
22 Merlin Gerin
thermal magnetic trip unit TM
t
E19528
1
1 3
Ir Im 10 5 TM 250 D
250A / 40°C
9 6 3
1 .8 7
.9 8
x 250A x 250A Ir Im
0 Ir Im I
Merlin Gerin 23